ANSYS CFX Tutorials

ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
2600 ANSYS Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
[email protected]
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494

Release 17.0
January 2016
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.

Copyright and Trademark Information

2015 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS, AIM
and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks
or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark
used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product,
service and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, Contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials ................................................................................................ 1
1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode ..................................... 3
1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench ..................................................................... 4
1.2.1. Setting Up the Project .............................................................................................................. 4
1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................................... 5
1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ................................................................... 5
1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .......................................................................................... 5
1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations ...................................................... 5
1.2.6. Closing the Applications ........................................................................................................... 6
1.3. Playing a Session File ........................................................................................................................ 6
1.4. Changing the Display Colors ............................................................................................................. 7
1.5. Editor Buttons .................................................................................................................................. 7
1.6. Using Help ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2. Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode ........................................................ 9
2.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................... 9
2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 10
2.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 11
2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 11
2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode ..................................................................................................... 12
2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition ................................................................................................. 12
2.4.3. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4. Using the Viewer .................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4.1. Using the Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4.2. Rotating the Geometry .................................................................................................. 13
2.4.5. Defining Model Data .............................................................................................................. 14
2.4.6. Defining Boundaries ............................................................................................................... 15
2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data ........................................................................................................... 15
2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification ...................................................................................................... 15
2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification .......................................................................................... 15
2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions ..................................................................... 15
2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition ..................................................................... 16
2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition ............................................................................... 17
2.4.13. Moving to General Mode ...................................................................................................... 17
2.4.14. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 17
2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 18
2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager ..................................................... 18
2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 19
2.5.1. Starting the Run ..................................................................................................................... 19
2.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ....................................................................... 20
2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 20
2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object ....................................................................... 21
2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline ..................................................................... 23
2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point ....................................................................... 24
2.6.4. Rearranging the Point ............................................................................................................ 25
2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend ................................................................................................. 26
2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 27
2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry ............................................................................................... 28
2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views ................................................................................................. 28
2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes ........................................................................................................... 29
2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane ........................................................................................................ 30
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

iii

Tutorials
2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 31
2.6.12. Adding Contours .................................................................................................................. 31
2.6.13. Working with Animations ..................................................................................................... 32
2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box .............................................................................. 33
2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe .......................................................................................... 33
2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe ..................................................................................... 34
2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation ................................................................................................ 36
2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation ............................................................................................. 37
2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie ............................................................................................................ 38
2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 39
3. Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench ............................................................................ 41
3.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 41
3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 42
3.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 43
3.4. Setting Up the Project ..................................................................................................................... 43
3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 43
3.5.1. Creating the Simulation Definition .......................................................................................... 45
3.5.2. Setting the Physics Definition ................................................................................................. 45
3.5.3. Defining Boundaries ............................................................................................................... 46
3.5.4. Setting Boundary Data ........................................................................................................... 46
3.5.5. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition ....................................................................... 46
3.5.6. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition ................................................................................. 47
3.5.7. Moving to General Mode ........................................................................................................ 47
3.5.8. Using the Viewer .................................................................................................................... 47
3.5.8.1. Using the Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 47
3.5.8.2. Rotating the Geometry .................................................................................................. 48
3.5.9. Setting Solver Control ............................................................................................................ 49
3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 49
3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 51
3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object ....................................................................... 52
3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline ..................................................................... 53
3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point ....................................................................... 54
3.7.4. Rearranging the Point ............................................................................................................ 55
3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend ................................................................................................. 56
3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 57
3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry ............................................................................................... 58
3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views ................................................................................................. 58
3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes ........................................................................................................... 59
3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane ........................................................................................................ 60
3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 61
3.7.12. Adding Contours .................................................................................................................. 61
3.7.13. Working with Animations ..................................................................................................... 63
3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box .............................................................................. 63
3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe .......................................................................................... 63
3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe ..................................................................................... 64
3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation ................................................................................................ 66
3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation ............................................................................................. 67
3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie ............................................................................................................ 68
3.7.14. Closing the Applications ....................................................................................................... 69
4. Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh) ................................................................................................... 71
4.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 71
4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 72

iv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
4.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 72
4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 73
4.4.1. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 73
4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1 .......................................................................................... 74
4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings ....................................................................................................... 75
4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting ................................................................................ 76
4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters .................................................................................................... 76
4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................... 77
4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 77
4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File ............................................................................... 78
4.5.2. Confirming Results ................................................................................................................. 78
4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ....................................................................... 79
4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 79
4.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 79
4.6.2. Coloring the Slice Plane .......................................................................................................... 80
4.6.3. Loading Results from Tutorial 1 for Comparison ...................................................................... 81
4.6.4. Comparing Slice Planes Using Multiple Views .......................................................................... 82
4.6.5. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Outlet ................................................................................. 83
4.6.6. Looking at the Inflated Elements in Three Dimensions ............................................................. 83
4.6.7. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Mixer Body .......................................................................... 85
4.6.8. Viewing the Layers of Inflated Elements on a Plane ................................................................. 85
4.6.9. Viewing the Mesh Statistics .................................................................................................... 86
4.6.10. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle ............................................................. 86
4.6.11. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle Using a Point ........................................ 87
4.6.12. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 87
5. Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe ................................................................................................ 89
5.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 89
5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 90
5.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 91
5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 91
5.4.1. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 92
5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties .............................................................. 92
5.4.3. Plotting an Expression ............................................................................................................ 93
5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression ........................................................................................................ 94
5.4.5. Modify Material Properties ..................................................................................................... 94
5.4.6. Creating the Domain .............................................................................................................. 94
5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................ 95
5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 96
5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................ 98
5.4.10. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 98
5.4.11. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 99
5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 99
5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 100
5.5.1. Starting the Run ................................................................................................................... 100
5.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ...................................................................... 100
5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 100
5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry ................................................................................ 101
5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet ..................................... 101
5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges ...................................................................................... 101
5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color .......................................................................... 102
5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet ............................................................. 102
5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy ................................................................................... 103
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 104
6. Flow from a Circular Vent .................................................................................................................... 105
6.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 105
6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 106
6.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 107
6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 107
6.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 107
6.4.2. Creating an Additional Variable ............................................................................................. 108
6.4.3. Defining the Steady-State Analysis ........................................................................................ 108
6.4.3.1. Renaming the Analysis ................................................................................................. 108
6.4.3.2. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................... 108
6.4.3.3. Creating the Boundaries .............................................................................................. 109
6.4.3.3.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................... 110
6.4.3.3.2. Opening Boundary ............................................................................................. 111
6.4.3.3.3. Inlet for the Vent ................................................................................................. 112
6.4.3.4. Setting Initial Values .................................................................................................... 113
6.4.3.5. Setting Solver Control .................................................................................................. 113
6.4.4. Defining the Transient Analysis ............................................................................................. 114
6.4.4.1. Creating the Analysis ................................................................................................... 114
6.4.4.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ......................................................................................... 114
6.4.4.3. Modifying the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 115
6.4.4.3.1. To Modify the Vent Inlet Boundary Condition ....................................................... 115
6.4.4.3.2. Plotting Smoke Concentration ............................................................................. 116
6.4.4.4. Initialization Values ...................................................................................................... 117
6.4.4.5. Modifying the Solver Control ....................................................................................... 118
6.4.4.6. Setting Output Control ................................................................................................ 118
6.4.5. Configuring Simulation Control ............................................................................................ 119
6.4.5.1. Configuration Control for the Steady State Analysis ...................................................... 119
6.4.5.2. Configuration Control for the Transient Analysis ........................................................... 120
6.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.mdef ) File .............................................................................. 121
6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 121
6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 122
6.6.1. Displaying Smoke Density Using an Isosurface ...................................................................... 122
6.6.2. Viewing the Results at Different Time Steps ........................................................................... 123
6.6.3. Generating Titled Image Files ................................................................................................ 123
6.6.3.1. Adding a Title .............................................................................................................. 123
6.6.3.2. JPEG output ................................................................................................................ 124
6.6.4. Generating a Movie .............................................................................................................. 125
6.6.5. Viewing the Dispersion of Smoke at the Final Time Step ........................................................ 126
7. Flow Around a Blunt Body ................................................................................................................... 127
7.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 127
7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 128
7.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 129
7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 129
7.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 129
7.4.2. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 130
7.4.3. Creating Composite Regions ................................................................................................ 131
7.4.4. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 131
7.4.4.1. Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................................. 131
7.4.4.2. Outlet Boundary .......................................................................................................... 132
7.4.4.3. Free-Slip Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 132
7.4.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary ........................................................................................... 133

vi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
7.4.4.5. Wall Boundary on the Blunt Body Surface ..................................................................... 133
7.4.5. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 134
7.4.6. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 134
7.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 135
7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 135
7.5.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial ............................................................................................... 136
7.5.2. Obtaining a Solution in Parallel ............................................................................................. 136
7.5.2.1. Background to Parallel Running in CFX ......................................................................... 136
7.5.2.2. Obtaining a Solution with Local Parallel ........................................................................ 136
7.5.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel .............................................................. 137
7.5.2.4.Text Output when Running in Parallel ........................................................................... 139
7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 140
7.6.1. Using Symmetry Plane to Display the Full Geometry ............................................................. 140
7.6.1.1. Manipulating the Geometry ......................................................................................... 141
7.6.1.2. Creating an Instance Transform .................................................................................... 141
7.6.1.3. Using the Reflection Transform .................................................................................... 142
7.6.2. Creating Velocity Vectors ...................................................................................................... 142
7.6.2.1. Creating the Sampling Plane ........................................................................................ 142
7.6.2.2. Creating a Vector Plot Using Different Sampling Methods ............................................. 143
7.6.3. Displaying Pressure Distribution on Body and Symmetry Plane ............................................. 144
7.6.4. Creating Surface Streamlines to Display the Path of Air along the Surface of the Body ............ 145
7.6.5. Moving Objects .................................................................................................................... 146
7.6.6. Creating a Surface Plot of y+ ................................................................................................. 146
7.6.7. Demonstrating Power Syntax ............................................................................................... 147
7.6.8. Viewing the Mesh Partitions (Parallel Only) ............................................................................ 148
8. Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity .................................................................................................. 149
8.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 149
8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 150
8.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 150
8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 151
8.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 151
8.4.2. Analysis Type ........................................................................................................................ 152
8.4.3. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 153
8.4.4. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 154
8.4.4.1. Hot and Cold Wall Boundary ........................................................................................ 154
8.4.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary ........................................................................................... 155
8.4.5. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 156
8.4.6. Setting Output Control ......................................................................................................... 156
8.4.7. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 157
8.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 158
8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 158
8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 159
8.6.1. Simple Report ...................................................................................................................... 159
8.6.2. Plots for Customized Reports ................................................................................................ 159
8.6.2.1. Contour Plot of Temperature ........................................................................................ 159
8.6.2.2. Point Locators .............................................................................................................. 160
8.6.2.3. Comment .................................................................................................................... 160
8.6.2.4. Figure .......................................................................................................................... 160
8.6.2.5.Time Chart of Temperature ........................................................................................... 161
8.6.2.6. Table of Temperature Values ......................................................................................... 162
8.6.3. Customized Report ............................................................................................................... 162
8.6.4. Animations .......................................................................................................................... 162
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

vii

Tutorials
8.6.5. Completion .......................................................................................................................... 162
9. Free Surface Flow Over a Bump .......................................................................................................... 163
9.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 163
9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 164
9.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 165
9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 165
9.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 165
9.4.2. Viewing the Region Labels .................................................................................................... 166
9.4.3. Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions ...................................................... 166
9.4.3.1. Creating Expressions in CEL ......................................................................................... 167
9.4.3.2. Reading Expressions From a File ................................................................................... 167
9.4.4. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 168
9.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 170
9.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................................. 170
9.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary .......................................................................................................... 170
9.4.5.3. Symmetry Boundaries .................................................................................................. 171
9.4.5.4. Opening and Wall Boundaries ...................................................................................... 171
9.4.6. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 173
9.4.7. Setting Mesh Adaption Parameters ....................................................................................... 174
9.4.8. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................... 175
9.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 176
9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 176
9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 177
9.6.1. Creating Velocity Vector Plots ............................................................................................... 178
9.6.2. Viewing Mesh Refinement .................................................................................................... 179
9.6.3. Creating an Isosurface to Show the Free Surface ................................................................... 182
9.6.4. Creating a Polyline that Follows the Free Surface ................................................................... 183
9.6.5. Creating a Chart to Show the Height of the Surface ............................................................... 183
9.6.6. Further Postprocessing ......................................................................................................... 184
9.7. Further Discussion ........................................................................................................................ 184
10. Supersonic Flow Over a Wing ............................................................................................................ 185
10.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 185
10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 186
10.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 186
10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 187
10.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 187
10.4.2. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 187
10.4.3. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 188
10.4.3.1. Creating an Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................ 188
10.4.3.2. Creating an Outlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries ................................................................... 190
10.4.3.4. Creating a Free Slip Boundary .................................................................................... 190
10.4.3.5. Creating a Wall Boundary ........................................................................................... 191
10.4.4. Creating Domain Interfaces ................................................................................................ 191
10.4.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 191
10.4.6. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................. 192
10.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 193
10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 193
10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 194
10.6.1. Displaying Mach Information .............................................................................................. 194
10.6.2. Displaying Pressure Information ......................................................................................... 194
10.6.3. Displaying Temperature Information ................................................................................... 195

viii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
10.6.4. Displaying Pressure With User Vectors ................................................................................. 195
11. Flow Through a Butterfly Valve ......................................................................................................... 197
11.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 197
11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 198
11.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 199
11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 199
11.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 199
11.4.2. Defining the Properties of the Sand .................................................................................... 200
11.4.3. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 201
11.4.4. Creating the Inlet Velocity Profile ........................................................................................ 206
11.4.5. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 207
11.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 207
11.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 210
11.4.5.3. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 211
11.4.5.4. Pipe Wall Boundary .................................................................................................... 211
11.4.5.5. Editing the Default Boundary ..................................................................................... 212
11.4.6. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 213
11.4.7. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................. 213
11.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 215
11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 215
11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 215
11.6.1. Erosion Due to Sand Particles .............................................................................................. 215
11.6.2. Displaying Erosion on the Pipe Wall .................................................................................... 216
11.6.3. Creating Particle Tracks ....................................................................................................... 216
11.6.4. Creating a Particle Track Animation ..................................................................................... 217
11.6.5. Determining Minimum, Maximum, and Average Pressure Values .......................................... 218
11.6.6. Other Features ................................................................................................................... 219
12. Flow in a Catalytic Converter ............................................................................................................ 221
12.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 221
12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 222
12.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 223
12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 223
12.4.1. Importing the Meshes and CCL File ..................................................................................... 224
12.4.1.1. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File ................................................... 224
12.4.1.2. Importing the Housing Mesh ..................................................................................... 225
12.4.1.3. Importing the Pipe and Flange Mesh .......................................................................... 225
12.4.1.4. Creating a Second Pipe and Flange Mesh ................................................................... 226
12.4.1.5. Creating a Single Region for Both Pipe and Flange Meshes ......................................... 226
12.4.2. Creating the Fluid Domain .................................................................................................. 227
12.4.3. Creating the Porous Domain ............................................................................................... 228
12.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundaries ................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.1. Creating the Inlet Boundary ....................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.2. Creating the Outlet Boundary .................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.3. Editing the Housing Default Boundary ....................................................................... 232
12.4.5. Creating the Domain Interfaces .......................................................................................... 233
12.4.6. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 234
12.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 235
12.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 235
12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 235
12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 236
12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface ................................................................................... 236
12.6.2. Creating User Locations ...................................................................................................... 237
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

ix

Tutorials
12.6.2.1. Creating a Slice Plane ................................................................................................. 237
12.6.2.2. Creating a User Surface .............................................................................................. 238
12.6.2.3. Creating a Polyline ..................................................................................................... 239
12.6.3. Creating Plots ..................................................................................................................... 240
12.6.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot of Pressure ............................................................................ 240
12.6.3.2. Creating a Vector Plot on the Slice Plane ..................................................................... 241
12.6.3.3. Creating a Chart of Pressure versus the Z Coordinate .................................................. 241
12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data ...................................................................................................... 242
13. Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus ........................................................................................ 245
13.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 245
13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 245
13.3. Background Theory ..................................................................................................................... 246
13.4. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 247
13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 248
13.5.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 248
13.5.2. Creating the Fluid ............................................................................................................... 248
13.5.3. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 250
13.5.4. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 250
13.5.4.1. Wall Boundary for the Inner Pipe ................................................................................ 250
13.5.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 251
13.5.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 252
13.5.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 253
13.5.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 253
13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 254
13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 254
14. Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage .......................................................................................................... 257
14.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 257
14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 258
14.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 260
14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model ................................................... 261
14.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 261
14.4.1.1. Basic Settings ............................................................................................................ 261
14.4.1.2. Component Definition ............................................................................................... 262
14.4.1.3. Physics Definition ...................................................................................................... 263
14.4.1.4. Interface Definition .................................................................................................... 265
14.4.1.5. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................. 265
14.4.1.6. Final Operations ........................................................................................................ 265
14.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 265
14.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 266
14.4.2.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial ..................................................................................... 266
14.4.2.2. Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel ..................................................................... 266
14.4.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel ............................................................ 267
14.4.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ........................................................................... 267
14.4.2.4.1. Initializing Turbo-Post ........................................................................................ 267
14.4.2.4.2. Viewing Three Domain Passages ........................................................................ 268
14.4.2.4.3. Blade Loading Turbo Chart ................................................................................ 269
14.4.3. Simulating the Stage with the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate Boundary Condition ............... 269
14.4.3.1. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 271
14.4.3.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ..................................................... 271
14.4.4. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post .......................................................................... 272
14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model ......................................................... 274
14.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 274

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
14.5.1.1. Modifying the Physics Definition ................................................................................ 274
14.5.1.2. Setting Output Control .............................................................................................. 276
14.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control ...................................................................................... 277
14.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 277
14.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 277
14.5.2.1. Serial Solution ........................................................................................................... 277
14.5.2.2. Parallel Solution ......................................................................................................... 278
14.5.2.3. Monitoring the Run ................................................................................................... 278
14.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 278
14.5.3.1. Initializing Turbo-Post ................................................................................................ 278
14.5.3.2. Displaying a Surface of Constant Span ........................................................................ 279
14.5.3.3. Using Multiple Turbo Viewports ................................................................................. 279
14.5.3.4. Creating a Turbo Surface at Mid-Span ......................................................................... 279
14.5.3.5. Setting up Instancing Transformations ....................................................................... 280
14.5.3.6. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ...................................... 280
14.5.3.7. Further Postprocessing .............................................................................................. 282
15. Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube ......................................................................................................... 283
15.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 283
15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 284
15.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 286
15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 286
15.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 287
15.4.2. Creating a Multicomponent Fluid ........................................................................................ 287
15.4.2.1. Acid Properties .......................................................................................................... 287
15.4.2.2. Alkali Properties ......................................................................................................... 289
15.4.2.3. Reaction Product Properties ....................................................................................... 291
15.4.2.4. Fluid Properties ......................................................................................................... 292
15.4.3. Creating an Additional Variable to Model pH ....................................................................... 293
15.4.4. Formulating the Reaction and pH as Expressions ................................................................. 293
15.4.4.1. Stoichiometric Ratio .................................................................................................. 293
15.4.4.2. Reaction Source Terms ............................................................................................... 295
15.4.4.3. Calculating pH ........................................................................................................... 297
15.4.4.4. Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH .............................................. 298
15.4.5. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 299
15.4.6. Creating a Subdomain to Model the Chemical Reactions ..................................................... 301
15.4.7. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 304
15.4.7.1. Water Inlet Boundary ................................................................................................. 304
15.4.7.2. Acid Inlet Boundary ................................................................................................... 305
15.4.7.3. Alkali Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 306
15.4.7.4. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 307
15.4.7.5. Symmetry Boundary .................................................................................................. 307
15.4.7.6. Default Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 308
15.4.8. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 308
15.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 310
15.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 310
15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 311
15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 311
16. Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil ..................................................................................................... 313
16.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 313
16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 314
16.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 315
16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 315
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xi

Tutorials
16.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 316
16.4.2. Editing the Material Properties ............................................................................................ 316
16.4.3. Defining the Calcium Carbonate Deposit Material ............................................................... 317
16.4.4. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 318
16.4.4.1. Creating a Fluid Domain ............................................................................................ 318
16.4.4.2. Creating a Solid Domain ............................................................................................ 319
16.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 320
16.4.5.1. Heating Coil Boundaries ............................................................................................. 320
16.4.5.2. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 321
16.4.5.3. Opening Boundary .................................................................................................... 321
16.4.6. Creating the Domain Interface ............................................................................................ 322
16.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 323
16.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 324
16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager ....................................................................... 324
16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 324
16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range ......................................................................................... 324
16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator ............................................................................................. 325
16.6.2.1. Expression ................................................................................................................. 325
16.6.2.2. Variable ..................................................................................................................... 325
16.6.2.3. Isosurface of the variable ........................................................................................... 326
16.6.2.4. Creating a Temperature Profile Chart .......................................................................... 327
16.6.3. Specular Lighting ............................................................................................................... 328
16.6.4. Moving the Light Source ..................................................................................................... 328
16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS ................................................................................................... 328
16.7.1. Thermal Data ...................................................................................................................... 329
16.7.2. Mechanical Stresses ............................................................................................................ 329
17. Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel .................................................................................................. 331
17.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 331
17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 332
17.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 333
17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 334
17.4.1. Importing the Meshes ........................................................................................................ 334
17.4.1.1. Importing the Mixer Tank Mesh .................................................................................. 335
17.4.1.2. Importing the Impeller Mesh ...................................................................................... 335
17.4.1.3. Relocating the Impeller Mesh ..................................................................................... 336
17.4.1.4. Viewing the Mesh at the Tank Periodic Boundary ........................................................ 336
17.4.2. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 336
17.4.2.1. Rotating Domain for the Impeller ............................................................................... 337
17.4.2.2. Stationary Domain for the Main Tank .......................................................................... 341
17.4.3. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 341
17.4.3.1. Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................................... 342
17.4.3.2. Degassing Outlet Boundary ....................................................................................... 343
17.4.3.3. Thin Surface for the Baffle .......................................................................................... 344
17.4.3.4. Wall Boundary for the Shaft ........................................................................................ 345
17.4.3.5. Required Boundary in the Impeller Domain ................................................................ 346
17.4.3.6. Modifying the Default Wall Boundary ......................................................................... 347
17.4.4. Creating the Domain Interfaces .......................................................................................... 348
17.4.4.1. Modeling the Blade Using a Domain Interface ............................................................ 348
17.4.4.2. Rotational Periodic Interfaces ..................................................................................... 350
17.4.4.3. Frozen Rotor Interfaces .............................................................................................. 351
17.4.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 353
17.4.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 355

xii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
17.4.7. Adding Monitor Points ....................................................................................................... 356
17.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 356
17.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 357
17.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 357
17.6.1. Creating a Plane Locator ..................................................................................................... 357
17.6.2. Plotting Velocity ................................................................................................................. 358
17.6.3. Plotting Pressure Distribution ............................................................................................. 359
17.6.4. Plotting Volume Fractions ................................................................................................... 359
17.6.5. Plotting Shear Strain Rate and Shear Stress ......................................................................... 359
17.6.6. Calculating Torque and Power Requirements ...................................................................... 360
18. Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor ................................................................................................ 363
18.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 363
18.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 364
18.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 365
18.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 365
18.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 366
18.4.2. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 366
18.4.3. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 370
18.4.3.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 370
18.4.3.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 371
18.4.3.3. Draft Tube Boundaries ............................................................................................... 372
18.4.3.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 373
18.4.3.5. Modifying the Default Boundary ................................................................................ 373
18.4.4. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 374
18.4.5. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 377
18.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 378
18.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 379
18.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 379
18.6.1. Creating Water Velocity Vector Plots .................................................................................... 379
18.6.2. Creating Volume Fraction Plots ........................................................................................... 380
18.6.3. Displaying the Entire Airlift Reactor Geometry ..................................................................... 382
18.7. Further Discussion ...................................................................................................................... 382
19. Air Conditioning Simulation ............................................................................................................. 385
19.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 385
19.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 386
19.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 388
19.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 388
19.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 389
19.4.2. Importing CEL Expressions ................................................................................................. 389
19.4.3. Compiling the Fortran Subroutine for the Thermostat ......................................................... 390
19.4.4. Creating a User CEL Function for the Thermostat ................................................................. 391
19.4.5. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................... 392
19.4.6. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 393
19.4.7. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 395
19.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 395
19.4.7.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 396
19.4.7.3. Window Boundary ..................................................................................................... 397
19.4.7.4. Default Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 398
19.4.8. Closet Wall Interface ........................................................................................................... 399
19.4.9. Creating a Logical Expression for the Conditional GGI Interface ........................................... 400
19.4.10. Creating a Conditional GGI Interface for the Closet Door .................................................... 400
19.4.11. Creating Space Under the Closet Door .............................................................................. 402
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xiii

Tutorials
19.4.12. Setting Initial Values ......................................................................................................... 402
19.4.13. Setting Solver Control ....................................................................................................... 404
19.4.14. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 405
19.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 406
19.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 407
19.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 407
19.6.1. Creating Graphics Objects .................................................................................................. 408
19.6.1.1. Creating Planes .......................................................................................................... 408
19.6.1.2. Creating an Isosurface ................................................................................................ 408
19.6.1.3. Adjusting the Legend ................................................................................................ 409
19.6.1.4. Creating a Point for the Thermometer ........................................................................ 409
19.6.1.5. Creating a Text Label .................................................................................................. 409
19.6.2. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................ 410
19.7. Further Discussion ...................................................................................................................... 411
20. Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor ............................................................................... 413
20.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 413
20.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 414
20.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 416
20.4. Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation .................... 417
20.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.2. Creating a Reacting Mixture ....................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.2.1. To create the variable composition mixture ........................................................ 418
20.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 418
20.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 420
20.4.1.4.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 420
20.4.1.4.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary ................................................................................. 420
20.4.1.4.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 421
20.4.1.4.4. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 422
20.4.1.4.5. Vanes Boundary ................................................................................................ 422
20.4.1.4.6. Default Wall Boundary ....................................................................................... 423
20.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 423
20.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 425
20.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 426
20.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 426
20.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 427
20.4.3.1. Temperature Within the Domain ................................................................................ 427
20.4.3.2. The NO Concentration in the Combustor .................................................................... 427
20.4.3.3. Printing a Greyscale Graphic ....................................................................................... 428
20.4.3.4. Calculating NO Mass Fraction at the Outlet ................................................................. 428
20.4.3.5. Viewing Flow Field ..................................................................................................... 428
20.4.3.6. Viewing Radiation ...................................................................................................... 430
20.5. Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete Transfer Radiation .................................................................................................................................................. 430
20.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 431
20.5.1.1. Removing Old Reactions ............................................................................................ 432
20.5.1.2. Importing a New Reaction ......................................................................................... 432
20.5.1.3. Generating the Flamelet Library ................................................................................. 433
20.5.1.4. Modifying the Reacting Mixture ................................................................................. 434
20.5.1.5. Modifying the Default Domain ................................................................................... 435
20.5.1.6. Modifying the Boundaries .......................................................................................... 436
20.5.1.6.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 436

xiv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
20.5.1.6.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary ................................................................................. 437
20.5.1.6.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 437
20.5.1.7. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 438
20.5.1.8. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 438
20.5.1.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 439
20.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 439
20.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 440
20.5.3.1. Viewing Temperature within the Domain .................................................................... 440
20.5.3.2. Viewing the NO Concentration in the Combustor ....................................................... 440
20.5.3.3. Calculating NO Concentration .................................................................................... 440
20.5.3.4. Viewing CO Concentration ......................................................................................... 441
20.5.3.5. Calculating CO Mass Fraction at the Outlet ................................................................. 441
20.5.3.6. Further Postprocessing .............................................................................................. 441
21. Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil .......................................................................................................... 443
21.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 443
21.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 444
21.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 444
21.4. Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation ................................................................................ 445
21.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.2. Loading Materials ...................................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 446
21.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 447
21.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 447
21.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 448
21.4.1.4.3. Free Slip Wall Boundary ..................................................................................... 448
21.4.1.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundaries .............................................................................. 448
21.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 449
21.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 450
21.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 451
21.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 451
21.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 452
21.4.3.1. Plotting Pressure Distribution Data ............................................................................. 452
21.4.3.2. Exporting Pressure Distribution Data .......................................................................... 455
21.4.3.3. Saving the Postprocessing State ................................................................................. 455
21.5. Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation ...................................................................................... 455
21.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 455
21.5.1.1. Adding Cavitation ...................................................................................................... 456
21.5.1.2. Modifying Solver Control ........................................................................................... 457
21.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control ...................................................................................... 457
21.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 457
21.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 458
21.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 458
22. Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver ................... 463
22.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 463
22.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 464
22.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 465
22.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 465
22.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 465
22.4.2. Defining a Transient Simulation .......................................................................................... 466
22.4.3. Editing the Domain ............................................................................................................ 467
22.4.4. Creating a Coordinate Frame .............................................................................................. 469
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xv

Tutorials
22.4.5. Creating a Rigid Body ......................................................................................................... 470
22.4.6. Creating the Subdomain ..................................................................................................... 472
22.4.7. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 472
22.4.7.1. Ball Boundary ............................................................................................................ 473
22.4.7.2. Symmetry Boundary .................................................................................................. 473
22.4.7.3. Vertical Valve Wall Boundary ....................................................................................... 474
22.4.7.4. Tank Opening Boundary ............................................................................................ 474
22.4.7.5. Valve Opening Boundary ........................................................................................... 475
22.4.8. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 476
22.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 476
22.4.10. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 477
22.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 478
22.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 478
22.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 479
22.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 479
22.6.2. Creating Points and a Vector Plot ........................................................................................ 480
22.6.3. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................ 481
23. Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction ............................................................. 485
23.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 485
23.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 486
23.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 487
23.4. Setting up the Project ................................................................................................................. 487
23.5. Adding Analysis Systems to the Project ........................................................................................ 487
23.6. Adding a New Material for the Project ......................................................................................... 489
23.7. Adding Geometry to the Project .................................................................................................. 490
23.8. Defining the Physics in the Mechanical Application ...................................................................... 492
23.8.1. Generating the Mesh for the Structural System ................................................................... 492
23.8.2. Assigning the Material to Geometry .................................................................................... 492
23.8.3. Basic Analysis Settings ........................................................................................................ 492
23.8.4. Inserting Loads ................................................................................................................... 493
23.8.4.1. Fixed Support ............................................................................................................ 493
23.8.4.2. Fluid-Solid Interface ................................................................................................... 493
23.8.4.3. Pressure Load ............................................................................................................ 494
23.9. Completing the Setup for the Structural System ........................................................................... 494
23.10. Creating Named Selections on the Fluid Body ............................................................................ 495
23.11. Generating the Mesh for the Fluid System .................................................................................. 496
23.12. Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre ....................................... 496
23.12.1. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................. 497
23.12.2. Creating the Fluid ............................................................................................................. 498
23.12.3. Creating the Domain ........................................................................................................ 499
23.12.4. Creating the Boundaries ................................................................................................... 501
23.12.4.1. Fluid Solid External Boundary ................................................................................... 501
23.12.4.2. Symmetry Boundaries .............................................................................................. 502
23.12.5. Setting Initial Values ......................................................................................................... 502
23.12.6. Setting Solver Control ....................................................................................................... 503
23.12.7. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 505
23.13. Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 506
23.14. Viewing Results in CFD-Post ...................................................................................................... 507
23.14.1. Plotting Results on the Solid ............................................................................................. 507
23.14.2. Creating an Animation ...................................................................................................... 509
24. Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer ..................................................................................................... 511
24.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 511

xvi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
24.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 512
24.3. Setting Up ANSYS Workbench ..................................................................................................... 513
24.4. Creating the Project .................................................................................................................... 513
24.5. Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler .................................................................................... 514
24.5.1. Creating the Solid ............................................................................................................... 514
24.5.1.1. Setting Up the Grid .................................................................................................... 514
24.5.1.2. Creating the Basic Geometry ...................................................................................... 515
24.5.1.3. Revolving the Sketch ................................................................................................. 516
24.5.1.4. Create the First Inlet Pipe ........................................................................................... 517
24.5.1.4.1. Extrude the First Side-pipe ................................................................................ 518
24.5.1.4.2. Make the Solid Visible ....................................................................................... 518
24.5.1.5. Create the Second Inlet Pipe ...................................................................................... 519
24.5.1.6. Create Named Selections ........................................................................................... 520
24.6. Creating the Mesh ....................................................................................................................... 522
24.7. Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 522
24.8. Setting the Output Parameter in CFD-Post ................................................................................... 526
24.9. Investigating the Impact of Changing Design Parameters Manually .............................................. 527
24.10. Using Design of Experiments ..................................................................................................... 529
24.11. Viewing the Response Surface ................................................................................................... 530
24.12. Viewing the Optimization .......................................................................................................... 531
25. Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor ......................................... 533
25.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 533
25.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 534
25.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 536
25.4. Setting Up the Project ................................................................................................................. 536
25.5. Defining the Geometry Using ANSYS BladeGen ........................................................................... 536
25.5.1. Changing the Blade Design Properties ................................................................................ 537
25.5.2. Reviewing the Geometry .................................................................................................... 538
25.6. Defining the Mesh ...................................................................................................................... 539
25.6.1. Defining the CFD Mesh Using ANSYS TurboGrid .................................................................. 539
25.6.1.1. Defining the Shroud Tip ............................................................................................. 539
25.6.1.2. Defining the Topology ............................................................................................... 540
25.6.1.3. Specifying the Mesh Data Settings ............................................................................. 540
25.6.1.4. Generating the Mesh ................................................................................................. 541
25.6.2. Defining the Structural Mesh Using Mechanical Model ........................................................ 541
25.6.2.1. Specifying the Global Mesh Controls .......................................................................... 542
25.6.2.2. Defining the Virtual Topology ..................................................................................... 542
25.6.2.3. Specifying the Sizing Controls .................................................................................... 545
25.6.2.4. Specifying the Face Meshing Controls ........................................................................ 549
25.6.2.5. Specifying the Method Controls ................................................................................. 550
25.6.2.6. Generating the Mesh ................................................................................................. 551
25.7. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 551
25.7.1. Defining the Fluid Region Using Turbo Mode ...................................................................... 552
25.7.1.1. Configuring the Basic Settings ................................................................................... 552
25.7.1.2. Defining the Components .......................................................................................... 553
25.7.1.3. Defining the Physics .................................................................................................. 554
25.7.1.4. Specifying the Domain Interfaces ............................................................................... 555
25.7.1.5. Specifying the Boundaries ......................................................................................... 555
25.7.1.6. Setting the Final Operations ....................................................................................... 556
25.7.2. Defining the Solid Region Using General Mode ................................................................... 556
25.7.2.1. Specifying the Domains ............................................................................................. 556
25.7.2.2. Specifying the Boundaries ......................................................................................... 557
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xvii

Tutorials
25.7.2.3. Specifying the Domain Interfaces ............................................................................... 557
25.8. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 558
25.9. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 559
25.10. Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural .................................................... 560
25.10.1. Simulating the Structural Performance without Rotational Velocity .................................... 561
25.10.1.1. Importing the Loads ................................................................................................ 561
25.10.1.2. Specifying the Supports ........................................................................................... 562
25.10.1.3. Obtaining the Solution ............................................................................................. 563
25.10.2. Simulating the Structural Performance with Rotational Velocity ......................................... 563
25.10.2.1. Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................ 563
25.10.2.2. Obtaining the Solution ............................................................................................. 564
26. Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions ................................................ 565
26.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 565
26.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 567
26.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 568
26.4. Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case ........................................................................... 569
26.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 569
26.4.1.1. Basic Settings ............................................................................................................ 569
26.4.1.2. Component Definition ............................................................................................... 570
26.4.1.3. Physics Definition ...................................................................................................... 571
26.4.1.4. Interface Definition .................................................................................................... 572
26.4.1.5. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................. 573
26.4.1.6. Final Operations ........................................................................................................ 573
26.4.1.7. Defining the Properties of Water ................................................................................ 573
26.4.1.8. Modifications to Domain and Boundary Conditions .................................................... 576
26.4.1.9. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 577
26.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................... 578
26.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 579
26.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 579
26.4.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots ...................................................................................... 579
26.4.3.2. Static Pressure and Mass Fraction Contour Plots ......................................................... 580
26.4.3.3. Static Temperature Contour Plots ............................................................................... 580
26.5. Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case .................................................................... 581
26.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 581
26.5.1.1. Modifying the Domains ............................................................................................. 582
26.5.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 586
26.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 587
26.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 587
26.5.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots ...................................................................................... 588
26.5.3.2. Supercooling Contour Plot ......................................................................................... 588
26.5.3.3. Nucleation Rate and Droplet Number Contour Plots ................................................... 588
26.5.3.4. Mass Fraction and Particle Diameter Contour Plots ..................................................... 589
26.5.3.5. Gas and Condensed Phase Static Temperature Contour Plots ...................................... 590
27. Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid ............................................................................. 593
27.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 593
27.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 593
27.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 595
27.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 595
27.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 595
27.4.2. Creating Expressions for Time Step and Total Time .............................................................. 596
27.4.3. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................... 596
27.4.4. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 597

xviii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
27.4.4.1. Creating an Immersed Solid Domain .......................................................................... 597
27.4.4.2. Creating the Stationary Fluid Domain ......................................................................... 598
27.4.4.3. Creating the Rotating Fluid Domain ........................................................................... 601
27.4.5. Creating the Domain Interface ............................................................................................ 602
27.4.6. Creating Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................ 605
27.4.6.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 605
27.4.6.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 606
27.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 606
27.4.8. Setting Output Control ....................................................................................................... 607
27.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 608
27.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 609
27.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 610
27.6.1. Creating a Chart of Mass Flow versus Time .......................................................................... 610
27.6.2. Creating a Velocity Vector Plot ............................................................................................ 611
27.6.3. Changing the Appearance in Preparation for an Animation ................................................. 612
27.6.4. Creating a Keyframe Animation .......................................................................................... 614
28. Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump ........................................................................................ 617
28.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 617
28.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 617
28.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 619
28.4. Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure .............................................................................. 619
28.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 619
28.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 619
28.4.1.2. Loading Materials ...................................................................................................... 620
28.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 620
28.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 621
28.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 621
28.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 622
28.4.1.4.3. Wall Boundaries ................................................................................................ 622
28.4.1.5. Creating Domain Interfaces ........................................................................................ 623
28.4.1.5.1. Inblock to Passage Interface .............................................................................. 623
28.4.1.5.2. Passage to Outblock Interface ........................................................................... 624
28.4.1.6. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 624
28.4.1.7. Setting Solver Controls .............................................................................................. 626
28.4.1.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 627
28.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 627
28.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 627
28.5. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure ....................................................... 628
28.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 628
28.5.1.1. Modifying the Domain and Boundary Conditions ....................................................... 628
28.5.1.2. Creating Expressions .................................................................................................. 631
28.5.1.3. Adding Monitor Points ............................................................................................... 631
28.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 632
28.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 632
28.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 633
28.6. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures ............................................ 634
28.6.1. Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def ) Files for Lower Inlet Pressures .............................................. 634
28.6.2. Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager ............................................................. 635
28.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 635
28.6.3.1. Generating a Drop Curve ........................................................................................... 636
28.6.3.1.1. Creating a Table of the Head and NPSH Values ................................................... 636
28.6.3.1.2. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart ................................................................... 636
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xix

Tutorials
28.6.3.1.3. Viewing the Drop Curve .................................................................................... 637
28.6.3.1.4. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart (Optional Exercise) ..................................... 638
28.6.3.1.5. Viewing the Drop Curve .................................................................................... 640
28.6.3.2. Visualizing the Cavitation Regions (Optional Exercise) ................................................. 641
28.6.3.3. Restoring CFX run history and multi-configuration options ......................................... 642
29. Spray Dryer ........................................................................................................................................ 643
29.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 643
29.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 644
29.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 645
29.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 645
29.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 646
29.4.2. Importing the Evaporating CCL Drops Model Template ....................................................... 646
29.4.3. Editing the Domain ............................................................................................................ 647
29.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundary Conditions .................................................................... 648
29.4.4.1. Water Nozzle Boundary .............................................................................................. 649
29.4.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................................... 650
29.4.4.3. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 651
29.4.4.4. Domain 1 Default ...................................................................................................... 652
29.4.5. Creating a Domain Interface ............................................................................................... 652
29.4.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 653
29.4.7. Setting Output Control ....................................................................................................... 654
29.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 654
29.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 655
29.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 655
29.6.1. Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot ................................................................ 655
29.6.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction Using a Contour Plot ..................................................... 656
29.6.3. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Mean Particle Diameter Using a Contour Plot ............ 656
29.6.4. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Temperature Using a Contour Plot ............................ 656
29.6.5. Displaying the Liquid Water Temperature Using Particle Tracking ......................................... 656
29.6.6. Displaying the Diameter of a Water Drop Using Particle Tracking ......................................... 657
30. Coal Combustion ............................................................................................................................... 659
30.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 659
30.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 659
30.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 661
30.4. Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide ................................. 662
30.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 662
30.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 662
30.4.1.2. Importing the Coal Combustion Materials CCL File ...................................................... 662
30.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 664
30.4.1.4. Creating the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 668
30.4.1.4.1. Coal Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 668
30.4.1.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................. 671
30.4.1.4.3. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 672
30.4.1.4.4. Coal Gun No-Slip Wall Boundary ........................................................................ 673
30.4.1.4.5. Coal Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary ........................................................................ 673
30.4.1.4.6. Air Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary .......................................................................... 674
30.4.1.4.7. Furnace No-Slip Wall Boundary .......................................................................... 675
30.4.1.4.8. Quarl No-Slip Wall Boundary .............................................................................. 675
30.4.1.4.9. Symmetry Plane Boundaries .............................................................................. 676
30.4.1.5. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 676
30.4.1.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 678
30.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 679

xx

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
30.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 679
30.4.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Symmetry Plane ...................................................... 679
30.4.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction ............................................................................ 680
30.4.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity .............................................................................. 680
30.4.3.4. Displaying the Temperature of the Fuel Particles ......................................................... 680
30.4.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking ............................................ 680
30.5. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide ...................................... 681
30.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 681
30.5.1.1. Editing the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................ 681
30.5.1.1.1. Air Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................. 682
30.5.1.1.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 682
30.5.1.1.3. Deleting the Symmetry Plane Boundaries .......................................................... 683
30.5.1.2. Creating a Domain Interface ...................................................................................... 683
30.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 683
30.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 683
30.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 684
30.5.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Periodic Interface .................................................... 684
30.5.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction ............................................................................ 684
30.5.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity .............................................................................. 684
30.5.3.4. Displaying the Temperature using Particle Tracking .................................................... 685
30.5.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking ............................................ 685
30.6. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide ........................................... 685
30.6.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 685
30.6.1.1. Editing the Domain .................................................................................................... 686
30.6.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 687
30.6.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 687
30.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 688
31. Steam Jet ........................................................................................................................................... 689
31.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 689
31.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 690
31.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 691
31.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 691
31.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 691
31.4.2. Importing the Steam Jet CCL .............................................................................................. 692
31.4.3. Creating a Steady-State Analysis ......................................................................................... 693
31.4.4. Creating and Loading Materials .......................................................................................... 693
31.4.4.1. Loading the Steam3v, Steam3l, and Steam3vl Materials ............................................... 694
31.4.4.2. Creating the Gas Mixture Material .............................................................................. 694
31.4.4.3. Creating the Liquid Mixture Material .......................................................................... 695
31.4.5. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 695
31.4.6. Creating Subdomains ......................................................................................................... 699
31.4.6.1. Gas-to-Liquid Source Subdomain ............................................................................... 699
31.4.6.2. Liquid-to-Gas Source Subdomain ............................................................................... 705
31.4.7. Creating Boundaries ........................................................................................................... 710
31.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 711
31.4.7.2. Opening Boundary for the Outside Edges ................................................................... 712
31.4.7.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries ................................................................... 714
31.4.8. Creating a Time Step Expression ......................................................................................... 715
31.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 716
31.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 717
31.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 717
31.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 717
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxi

Tutorials
31.6.1. Displaying the Steam Molar Fraction ................................................................................... 717
31.6.2. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid Mass Transfer Rate .................................................................. 718
31.6.3. Displaying the Liquid-to-Gas Mass Transfer Rate .................................................................. 718
31.6.4. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid and Liquid-to-Gas Phase Transfer Rates in Synchronous
Views ........................................................................................................................................... 718
31.6.5. Creating a Chart to Plot the False Time Step Along a Line ..................................................... 719
32. Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver ........................................................................... 721
32.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 721
32.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 722
32.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 723
32.4. Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion .................................................................. 724
32.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 724
32.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 724
32.4.1.2. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File ................................................... 725
32.4.1.3. Defining a Transient Simulation .................................................................................. 725
32.4.1.4. Editing the Domain .................................................................................................... 727
32.4.1.5. Creating a Rigid Body ................................................................................................. 730
32.4.1.6. Creating the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 733
32.4.1.6.1. Symmetry Boundaries ....................................................................................... 733
32.4.1.6.2. Wall Boundaries ................................................................................................ 734
32.4.1.6.3. Opening Boundary ............................................................................................ 736
32.4.1.7. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 737
32.4.1.8. Setting the Solver Control .......................................................................................... 740
32.4.1.9. Setting the Output Control ........................................................................................ 741
32.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................... 743
32.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 743
32.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 744
32.4.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot .............................................................................................. 744
32.4.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation .................................................................................. 745
32.4.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle ................................................................ 747
32.5. Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion ...................................................................... 747
32.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 747
32.5.1.1. Creating a Subdomain ............................................................................................... 748
32.5.1.2. Editing the Domain Interfaces .................................................................................... 749
32.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 750
32.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 750
32.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 751
32.5.3.1. Loading a Contour Plot from the State File .................................................................. 751
32.5.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation .................................................................................. 751
32.5.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle ................................................................ 752
32.6. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post ................................................................................... 753
33. Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case ............................................................ 755
33.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 755
33.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 755
33.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 757
33.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 758
33.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 758
33.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 758
33.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 759
33.4.4. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings .................................................................................... 760
33.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 760
33.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 761

xxii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
33.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 762
33.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 762
33.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 762
33.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 763
33.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 763
33.6.3. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame .................................................................... 763
33.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 764
33.6.5. Applying the Local Rotating Frame to the Inlet Boundary .................................................... 766
33.6.6. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ..................................................... 766
33.6.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 768
33.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 769
33.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 770
33.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 770
33.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 770
33.8.3. Animating Temperature ...................................................................................................... 770
34. Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case ........................................................ 773
34.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 773
34.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 773
34.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 775
34.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 775
34.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 776
34.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 776
34.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 777
34.4.4. Disturbance Definition ....................................................................................................... 778
34.4.5. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings .................................................................................... 779
34.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 779
34.4.7. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame .................................................................... 780
34.4.8. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 781
34.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 782
34.4.10. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ................................................... 783
34.4.11. Setting the Execution Control ........................................................................................... 785
34.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 787
34.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 788
34.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post ............................................................... 788
34.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 789
34.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 789
34.6.3. Animating Temperature ...................................................................................................... 789
35. Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case ...................................................... 791
35.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 791
35.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 791
35.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 793
35.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 793
35.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 794
35.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 794
35.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 795
35.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 796
35.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 796
35.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 797
35.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ................................................................................. 799
35.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 799
35.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 799
35.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 800
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxiii

Tutorials
35.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 800
35.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 800
35.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interface .................................................................................. 801
35.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 801
35.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 802
35.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 804
35.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 805
35.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 806
35.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 806
35.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 806
35.8.3. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 807
35.8.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 807
35.8.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 809
35.8.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations ................................................................. 809
35.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 810
36. Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer ...... 813
36.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 813
36.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 814
36.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 815
36.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre .............................. 816
36.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 816
36.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 817
36.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 817
36.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 819
36.4.5. Importing the Solid Blade Mesh File .................................................................................... 819
36.4.6. Creating the Solid Blade Domain ........................................................................................ 820
36.4.7. Modifying the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................... 821
36.4.7.1. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ...................................................................... 821
36.4.7.2. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ........................................................ 822
36.4.7.3. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ........................................................................ 824
36.4.7.4. Creating the Blade Base Boundary .............................................................................. 824
36.4.8. Creating the Conjugate Heat Transfer Interface ................................................................... 824
36.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 825
36.4.10. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ......................................................... 826
36.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 828
36.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 829
36.6. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 830
36.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 831
36.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 831
36.6.3. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 832
36.6.4. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 833
37. Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case .................................................. 835
37.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 835
37.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 836
37.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 837
37.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 838
37.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 838
37.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 839
37.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 840
37.4.4. Disturbance Definition ....................................................................................................... 841
37.4.5. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 842
37.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 842

xxiv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
37.4.7. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 843
37.4.8. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 844
37.4.9. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 845
37.4.10. Setting the Execution Control ........................................................................................... 847
37.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 849
37.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 849
37.5.1. Confirming Convergence Using Derived Variables ............................................................... 850
37.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post ............................................................... 852
37.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 852
37.6.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 853
37.6.3. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 854
37.6.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 854
37.6.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 855
37.6.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations ................................................................. 856
37.6.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 856
38. Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case ................................................................. 859
38.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 859
38.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 859
38.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 862
38.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 862
38.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 862
38.4.2. Expanding Profile Data ....................................................................................................... 863
38.4.3. Initializing Profile Data ........................................................................................................ 864
38.4.4. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 864
38.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 866
38.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 866
38.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 868
38.4.5.3. Wall Boundaries ......................................................................................................... 869
38.4.6. Creating Domain Interfaces ................................................................................................ 871
38.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 874
38.5. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 874
38.5.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 875
38.5.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 875
38.5.3. Modifying the Domain ........................................................................................................ 875
38.5.4. Creating Expressions for Frequency and Scaling Factor ........................................................ 876
38.5.5. Modifying the R1 Blade Boundary ....................................................................................... 876
38.5.6. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 879
38.5.7. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 880
38.5.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 885
38.6. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 885
38.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 886
38.8. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFD-Post ........................................... 887
38.8.1. Displaying Total Wall Work on the Blade .............................................................................. 887
38.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot for Total Wall Work on the Blade ...................................................... 888
38.8.3. Creating an Animation for Total Wall Work on the Blade ....................................................... 888
39. Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case ...................................... 891
39.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 891
39.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 891
39.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 893
39.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 893
39.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 894
39.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 894
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxv

Tutorials
39.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 895
39.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 896
39.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 897
39.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 897
39.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ................................................................................. 899
39.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 899
39.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 900
39.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 900
39.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 900
39.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 901
39.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interfaces ................................................................................. 901
39.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 902
39.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 903
39.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 906
39.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 906
39.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 907
39.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 907
39.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 908
39.8.3. Creating a Blade-to-Blade Plot ............................................................................................ 909
39.8.4. Creating a Chart of Force on a Rotor Blade versus Time ........................................................ 909
39.8.5. Creating a Chart of a Solution Monitor and Fourier Coefficient Data for Pressure versus
Time ............................................................................................................................................. 910
39.8.6. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 912
39.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 913

xxvi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

The CFX tutorials are designed to introduce general techniques used in CFX and to provide tips on
advanced modeling.
The initial tutorials introduce general principles used in CFX, including setting up the physical models,
running CFX-Solver and visualizing the results in CFD-Post; the later tutorials highlight specialized features
of CFX.
This manual contains the following tutorials:
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9) simulates a static mixer consisting
of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel; the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general
workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid into and out of a mixer.
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench (p. 41) simulates the previous tutorial using ANSYS
Workbench.
Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh) (p. 71) uses a refined mesh to obtain a better solution to the Static
Mixer problem created in the first tutorial.
Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe (p. 89) describes the general approach taken when working with an
existing mesh.
Flow from a Circular Vent (p. 105) simulates a chimney stack releasing smoke that is dispersed into the atmosphere with an oncoming side wind.
Flow Around a Blunt Body (p. 127) models the behavior of fluid flow around a generic vehicle body.
Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity (p. 149) models a buoyancy-driven flow that requires the inclusion of
gravitational effects.
Free Surface Flow Over a Bump (p. 163) demonstrates the simulation of a free surface flow in which the
bottom of the channel is interrupted by a semicircular bump.
Supersonic Flow Over a Wing (p. 185) simulates supersonic flow over a symmetric NACA0012 airfoil at an
angle of attack of 0.
Flow Through a Butterfly Valve (p. 197) investigates the detailed flow pattern around a valve to better understand why flow losses occur.
Flow in a Catalytic Converter (p. 221) models a catalytic converter in order to determine the pressure drop
and heat transfer through it.
Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus (p. 245) simulates a shear-thickening liquid rotating in a 2D eccentric
annular pipe gap.
Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage (p. 257) sets up a transient calculation of an axial turbine stage.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube (p. 283) models basic reacting flows using a multicomponent fluid and CEL
expressions.
Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil (p. 313) models the transfer of thermal energy from an electrically-heated
solid copper coil to the water flowing around it.
Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel (p. 331) simulates the mixing of water and air in a mixing vessel.
Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor (p. 363)demonstrates the Eulerian-Eulerian multiphase model by simulating an airlift reactor (a tall, gas-liquid contacting vessel used in processes where gas absorption is important).
Air Conditioning Simulation (p. 385) simulates a room with a thermostat-controlled air conditioner.
Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor (p. 413) gives a qualitative impression of the flow and temperature distributions inside a can combustor that burns methane in air.
Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil (p. 443) demonstrates cavitation in the flow of water around a hydrofoil by
modeling a thin slice of the hydrofoil and using two symmetry boundary conditions.
Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver (p. 463) uses an example
of a ball check valve to demonstrate both two-way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) between a ball and a
fluid, as well as the mesh-deformation capabilities of ANSYS CFX.
Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (p. 485) uses an oscillating plate to simulate a twoway Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) in ANSYS Workbench.
Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer (p. 511) shows how to use Design Points and DesignXplorer to optimize
the static mixer first shown in Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9).
Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor (p. 533) simulates the aerodynamic
and structural performance of a centrifugal compressor.
Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions (p. 565) uses an axial turbine to demonstrate
setting up and executing equilibrium and non-equilibrium steam calculations using the IAPWS water database
for properties.
Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid (p. 593) simulates a gear pump that drives a flow of water.
Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump (p. 617) uses a simple pump to illustrate the basic concepts of
setting up, running, and postprocessing a cavitation problem.
Spray Dryer (p. 643) models the way in which water drops are evaporated by a hot air flow.
Coal Combustion (p. 659) models coal combustion and radiation in a furnace.
Steam Jet (p. 689) simulates a high-speed wet steam jet into air.
Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver (p. 721) models the interaction between a rigid body
(represented by a buoy) and two fluids (air and water).
Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case (p. 755) sets up a transient blade row calculation
to model an inlet disturbance (frozen gust) in an axial turbine using the Time Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case (p. 773) sets up a transient blade row calculation
to model an inlet disturbance (frozen gust) in an axial turbine using the Fourier Transformation model.
2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode
Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 791) sets up a transient blade row calculation
using the Time Transformation model.
Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer (p. 813) sets up
a transient blade row calculation with conjugate heat transfer using the Time Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 835) sets up a transient blade row calculation using the Fourier Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case (p. 859) sets up a transient blade row simulation using
the Fourier Transformation model as part of blade flutter modeling.
Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 891) sets up a transient blade
row calculation with a multistage machine using the Time Transformation model.
You should review the following topics before attempting to start a tutorial for the first time:
1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode
1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench
1.3. Playing a Session File
1.4. Changing the Display Colors
1.5. Editor Buttons
1.6. Using Help

1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Standalone Mode
Before you start CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver Manager, or CFD-Post, set the working directory. The procedure
for setting the working directory and starting ANSYS CFX in stand-alone is listed below:
1.

Start the ANSYS CFX Launcher.

You can start the launcher in any of the following ways:
On Windows:
From the Start menu, select All Programs > ANSYS 17.0 > Fluid Dynamics > CFX 17.0.
In a DOS window that has its path set up correctly to run CFX, enter cfx5 (otherwise, you will need
to type the full pathname of the cfx5 command).
On Linux, enter cfx5 in a terminal window that has its path set up to run CFX.

2.

Specify the Working Directory in the launcher window.

3.

Click the CFX-Pre 17.0 button.

4.

If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.

Note
All tutorials assume that the CFX run history and multi-configuration options, under the
Load Results File dialog box in CFD-Post, is set to Load only the last results.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench

Most ANSYS CFX tutorials are written to work in stand-alone mode. This section includes the steps required to run these tutorials in ANSYS Workbench:
1.2.1. Setting Up the Project
1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations
1.2.6. Closing the Applications

Tip
You may find it useful to open the ANSYS CFX help from the ANSYS CFX Launcher (which
does not take up a license).

1.2.1. Setting Up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
17.0 > Workbench 17.0.
To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface, type the path to runwb2 (for
example, ~/ansys_inc/v170/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then press Enter.

2.

From the menu bar, click File > Save As and specify a name and directory for the project file, then click
Save.
The directory you choose will be referred to as the working directory.

3.

In the Toolbox pane, open Component Systems and double-click CFX. A CFX system opens in the Project
Schematic.

Note
You use a CFX component system because you are starting with a mesh. If you want
to create the geometry and mesh, you will start with a Fluid Flow (CFX) system.

4.

Type in the new name, such as System 1, to replace the highlighted text below the system.
Alternatively, you can right-click the first cell in the system and select Rename. The name will be
highlighted. Now you can change the highlighted text by typing in the new name.

5.

In the Project Schematic, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit to launch CFX-Pre.

6.

Continue from the section of the tutorial that provides instructions for defining the case using CFX-Pre.
The section is typically named Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench

1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

When running ANSYS CFX within ANSYS Workbench, no action is required for this section of the tutorial.
The required files are automatically transferred between the cells within the CFX component system.
Continue from Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 5).

1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Once the simulation setup is complete, the Solution cell prompts you to refresh it. To refresh that cell:

Right-click the Solution cell and select Refresh.

Note
If the Solution cell displays a prompt to perform an update, ignore it and proceed to
the next step.

To obtain a solution, you need to launch the CFX-Solver Manager and subsequently use it to start the
solver:
1.

Right-click the Solution cell and select Edit.

The CFX-Solver Manager appears with the Define Run dialog box displayed.

2.

Continue from the Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager section of the tutorial.

1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFX-Solver has finished, a completion message appears in a dialog box. Click OK.
Alternatively, a message saying This run of the ANSYS CFX-Solver has finished is
displayed in the final line of the *.out file in the CFX-Solver Manager.
Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results. At this point, the
Results cell in ANSYS Workbench prompts you to refresh:
1.

Right-click the Results cell and select Refresh.

2.

When the refresh is complete, right-click the Results cell and select Edit to open CFD-Post.

3.

Continue from the Viewing the Results in CFD-Post section of the tutorial.

If this is the final section of your tutorial, continue from Closing the Applications (p. 6). If you are
running ANSYS CFX tutorials with a sequence of multiple simulations, continue from Creating CFX
Component Systems for Multiple Simulations (p. 5).

1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations

Now that you have set the physics in the initial state, you will duplicate the CFX component system
created earlier and edit the physics in the new system. To duplicate the existing CFX component system:
1.

In the ANSYS Workbench Project Schematic, right-click the first cell in System 1 and select Duplicate.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

A new system named Copy of System 1 will appear in the Project Schematic.
2.

Type in the new name System 2 to replace the highlighted text below the system.

3.

Click the Solution cell of System 1 and drag it to the Solution cell of System 2.
You will now see a line, indicating a transfer connection, going from Solution cell of System 1
to the Solution cell of System 2.

4.

Once you have set up the new CFX component system, continue from Step 5 of Setting Up the Project (p. 4).

Note
In the tutorial, ignore the steps that tell you to set the initial values file in the Define
Run dialog box for CFX-Solver Manager. Dragging the solution cell between systems
automatically sets the initialization options in CFX-Solver Manager.

1.2.6. Closing the Applications

Close ANSYS Workbench (and the applications it launched) by selecting File > Exit from ANSYS Workbench. ANSYS Workbench prompts you to save all your project files.

1.3. Playing a Session File

Every tutorial involves instructions for setting up one or more simulations in CFX-Pre. If you want to
skip past those instructions and have CFX-Pre set up a simulation automatically, you can run the corresponding session file.
To play a tutorial session file:
1.

If required, launch CFX-Pre.

2.

Select Session > Play Session.

3.

Select the session file (*.pre) for the simulation.

4.

Click Open.

5.

If an Information dialog box appears, click OK.

CFX-Pre writes a CFX-Solver input file (*.def) in the directory that is set as your working directory.
In CFX-Pre, select File > Quit.

6.

On the ANSYS CFX-17.0 Launcher click CFX-Solver Manager 17.0.

7.

On the CFX-Solver Manager menu, select File > Define Run.

The Define Run dialog box appears.

8.

On the Define Run dialog box, click Browse

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Using Help
9.

In the CFX-Solver File dialog box that appears, choose the *.def file and click Open.

10. If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.
The tutorial input files (which include tutorial session files) can be downloaded from the ANSYS Customer
Portal.
Session files and tutorial session files can be played only in ANSYS CFX stand-alone, not in ANSYS
Workbench. Some tutorials have more than one tutorial session file; each covers a particular set of CFXPre setup instructions.
Playing a session file may change the default settings under Case Options > General these
changes will be retained until the case is closed. To override these changes (to Automatic Default
Domain and Automatic Default Interfaces, for example) the settings must be changed from the
Outline tree view under Case Options > General rather than from the global options (Edit >
Options). Changes made to the global options are persistent and will not take effect until a new case
is opened.

1.4. Changing the Display Colors

If viewing objects in ANSYS CFX becomes difficult due to contrast with the background, you can change
the colors for improved viewing. The color options are set in different places, depending on how you
run CFX:
1.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2.

Adjust the color settings under CFX-Pre > Graphics Style (for CFX-Pre) or CFD-Post > Viewer
(for CFD-Post).

3.

Click OK.

4.

If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.

1.5. Editor Buttons

The ANSYS CFX interface uses editors to enter the data required to set up and post-process a simulation.
The editors have standard buttons, which are described next:
Apply applies the information contained within all the tabs of an editor.
OK is the same as Apply, except that the editor automatically closes.
Cancel and Close both close the editor without applying or saving any changes.
Reset returns the settings for the object to those stored in the database for all the tabs. The settings are
stored in the database each time the Apply button is clicked.
Defaults restores the system default settings for all the tabs of the edited object.

1.6. Using Help

To open the ANSYS Help Viewer, select Help > Contents.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

Context-sensitive help is provided for many of the details views and other parts of the interface. To invoke
the context-sensitive help for a particular details view or other feature, ensure that the window is active,
place the mouse pointer over the feature, and press F1. Not every area of the interface supports contextsensitive help.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 2: Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in

Stand-alone Mode
This tutorial includes:
2.1.Tutorial Features
2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
2.3. Preparing the Working Directory
2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.

2.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre to set up a problem.
Using CFX-Solver Manager to obtain a solution.
Modifying the outline plot in CFD-Post.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to trace the flow field from a point.
Viewing temperature using colored planes and contours in CFD-Post.
Creating an animation and saving it as a movie file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Quick Setup Wizard

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Component

Feature

Details

CFD-Post

Animation

Keyframe

Plots

Contour
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Point
Slice Plane
Streamline

2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.
Water enters through both pipes at the same rate but at different temperatures. The first entry is at a
rate of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K and the second entry is at a rate of 2 m/s at a temperature
of 285 K. The radius of the mixer is 2 m.
Your goal in this tutorial is to understand how to use CFX to determine the speed and temperature of
the water when it exits the static mixer.
Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

10

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

StaticMixerMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Because you are starting with an existing mesh, you can immediately use CFX-Pre to define the simulation.
This is how CFX-Pre will look with the imported mesh:

The left pane of CFX-Pre displays the Outline workspace.

The tutorial follows this general workflow for Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre:
2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode
2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition
2.4.3. Importing a Mesh

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

11

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.4.4. Using the Viewer
2.4.5. Defining Model Data
2.4.6. Defining Boundaries
2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data
2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification
2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification
2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions
2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition
2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition
2.4.13. Moving to General Mode
2.4.14. Setting Solver Control
2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager
You can optionally skip past the steps for setting up the simulation in CFX-Pre. If you want to set up
the case automatically, then proceed to Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager (p. 18).

2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode

Quick Setup mode provides a simple wizard-like interface for setting up simple cases. This is useful for
getting familiar with the basic elements of a CFD problem setup. This section describes using Quick
Setup mode to develop a simulation in CFX-Pre.
1.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

The New Case File dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select Quick Setup and click OK.

Note
If this is the first time you are running this software, a message box will appear notifying
you that automatic generation of the default domain is active. To avoid seeing this
message again clear Show This Message Again.

3.

Select File > Save Case As.

4.

Under File name, type: StaticMixer

5.

Click Save.

2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition

You need to specify the fluids used in a simulation. A variety of fluids are already defined as library
materials. For this tutorial you will use a prepared fluid, Water, which is defined to be water at 25C.
1.

Ensure that the Simulation Definition panel is displayed at the top of the details view.

2.

Under Working Fluid > Fluid select Water.

12

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.4.3. Importing a Mesh

At least one mesh must be imported before physics are applied.
1.

In the Simulation Definition panel, under Mesh Data > Mesh File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Under Files of type, select CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx).

3.

From your working directory, select StaticMixerMesh.gtm.

4.

Click Open.
The mesh loads.

5.

Click Next.

2.4.4. Using the Viewer

Now that the mesh is loaded, take a moment to explore how you can use the viewer toolbar to zoom
in or out and to rotate the object in the viewer.

2.4.4.1. Using the Zoom Tools

There are several icons available for controlling the level of zoom in the viewer.
1.

Click Zoom Box

2.

Click and drag a rectangular box over the geometry.

3.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

The geometry zoom changes to display the selection at a greater resolution.

4.

Click Fit View

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

2.4.4.2. Rotating the Geometry

If you need to rotate an object or to view it from a new angle, you can use the viewer toolbar.
1.

Click Rotate

on the viewer toolbar.

2.

Click and drag within the geometry repeatedly to test the rotation of the geometry.
The geometry rotates based on the direction of mouse movement and based on the initial mouse
cursor shape, which changes depending on where the mouse cursor is in the viewer. If the mouse
drag starts near a corner of the viewer window, the motion of the geometry will be constrained
to rotation about a single axis, as indicated by the mouse cursor shape.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

13

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

3.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z Up).
A clearer view of the mesh is displayed.

2.4.5. Defining Model Data

You need to define the type of flow and the physical models to use in the fluid domain.
You will specify the flow as steady-state with turbulence and heat transfer. Turbulence is modeled using
the - turbulence model and heat transfer using the thermal energy model. The - turbulence
model is a commonly used model and is suitable for a wide range of applications. The thermal energy
model neglects high speed energy effects and is therefore suitable for low speed flow applications.
1.

Ensure that the Physics Definition panel is displayed.

2.

Under Model Data, set Reference Pressure to 1 [atm].

All other pressure settings are relative to this reference pressure.

3.

Set Heat Transfer to Thermal Energy.

4.

Set Turbulence to k-Epsilon.

14

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

5.

Click Next.

2.4.6. Defining Boundaries

The CFD model requires the definition of conditions on the boundaries of the domain.
1.

Ensure that the Boundary Definition panel is displayed.

2.

Delete Inlet and Outlet from the list by right-clicking each and selecting Delete Boundary.

3.

Right-click in the blank area where Inlet and Outlet were listed, then select Add Boundary.

4.

Set Name to in1.

5.

Click OK.
The boundary is created and, when selected, properties related to the boundary are displayed.

2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data

Once boundaries are created, you need to create associated data. Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with
2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), you will define the velocity and temperature for the first inlet.
1.

Ensure that in1 is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Boundary Type to Inlet.

3.

Set Location to in1.

2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification

Once boundary data is defined, the boundary needs to have the flow specification assigned.
1.

Ensure that Flow Specification is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Option to Normal Speed.

3.

Set Normal Speed to 2 [m s^-1].

2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification

Once flow specification is defined, the boundary needs to have temperature assigned.
1.

Ensure that Temperature Specification is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Static Temperature to 315 [K].

2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions

Defining the boundary condition for in1 required several steps. Here the settings are reviewed for accuracy.
Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), the first inlet boundary
condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K at one of the side inlets.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

15

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Review the boundary in1 settings on the Boundary Definition panel for accuracy. They should be as
follows:
Setting

Value

in1
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in1
> Location

in1

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

315 [K]

2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition

Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), you know the second inlet
boundary condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 285 K at one of the side inlets.
You will define that now.
1.

Under the Boundary Definition panel, right-click in the selector area and select Add Boundary.

2.

Create a new boundary named in2 with these settings:

Setting

Value

in2
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in2
> Location

in2

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

16

285 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition

Now that the second inlet boundary has been created, the same concepts can be applied to building
the outlet boundary.
1.

Create a new boundary named out with these settings:

Setting

Value

out
> Boundary Type

Outlet

out
> Location

out

Flow Specification
> Option

Average Static Pressure

Flow Specification
> Relative Pressure

2.

0 [Pa]

Click Next.

2.4.13. Moving to General Mode

There are no further boundary conditions that need to be set. All 2D exterior regions that have not
been assigned to a boundary condition are automatically assigned to the default boundary condition.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode and click Finish.

The three boundary conditions are displayed in the viewer as sets of arrows at the boundary surfaces.
Inlet boundary arrows are directed into the domain. Outlet boundary arrows are directed out of
the domain.

2.4.14. Setting Solver Control

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical solution generation process.
While an upwind advection scheme is less accurate than other advection schemes, it is also more robust.
This advection scheme is suitable for obtaining an initial set of results, but in general should not be
used to obtain final accurate results.
The time scale can be calculated automatically by the solver or set manually. The Automatic option
tends to be conservative, leading to reliable, but often slow, convergence. It is often possible to accelerate convergence by applying a time scale factor or by choosing a manual value that is more aggressive
than the Automatic option. In this tutorial, you will select a physical time scale, leading to convergence
that is twice as fast as the Automatic option.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Advection Scheme > Option to Upwind.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

17

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

3.

Set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control to Physical Timescale
and set the physical timescale value to 2 [s].

4.

Click OK.

2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

The simulation file, StaticMixer.cfx, contains the simulation definition in a format that can be
loaded by CFX-Pre, enabling you to complete (if applicable), restore, and modify the simulation definition.
The simulation file differs from the CFX-Solver input file in that it can be saved at any time while defining
the simulation.
1.

Click Define Run

2.

Set File name to StaticMixer.def.

3.

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (StaticMixer.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts
and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

4.

If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

5.

When you are finished, select File > Quit in CFX-Pre.

6.

If prompted, click Yes or Save & Quit to save StaticMixer.cfx.

7.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 19).

2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager

Note
This task is required only if you are starting here with the session file that was provided with
the tutorial input files. If you have performed all the tasks in the previous steps, proceed
directly to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 19).
Events in CFX-Pre can be recorded to a session file and then played back at a later date to drive CFXPre. Session files have been created for each tutorial so that the problems can be set up rapidly in CFXPre.
1.

If required, launch CFX-Pre.

2.

Select Session > Play Session.

3.

Select StaticMixer.pre.

4.

Click Open.
A CFX-Solver input file is written.

5.

18

Select File > Quit.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

6.

Launch the CFX-Solver Manager from the ANSYS CFX Launcher.

7.

After the CFX-Solver starts, select File > Define Run.

8.

Under CFX-Solver Input File, click Browse

9.

Select StaticMixer.def, located in the working directory.

2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

CFX-Solver Manager has a visual interface that displays a variety of results and should be used when
plotted data must be viewed during problem solving.
Two windows are displayed when CFX-Solver Manager runs. There is an adjustable split between the
windows, which is oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on the aspect ratio of the entire
CFX-Solver Manager window (also adjustable).

One window shows the convergence history plots and the other displays text output from CFX-Solver.
The text lists physical properties, boundary conditions and various other parameters used or calculated
in creating the model. All the text is written to the output file automatically (in this case, StaticMixer_001.out).

2.5.1. Starting the Run

The Define Run dialog box allows configuration of a run for processing by CFX-Solver.
When CFX-Solver Manager is launched automatically from CFX-Pre, all of the information required to
perform a new serial run (on a single processor) is entered automatically. You do not need to alter the
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

19

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

information in the Define Run dialog box. This is a very quick way to launch into CFX-Solver without
having to define settings and values.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver launches and a split screen appears and displays the results of the run graphically and
as text. The panes continue to build as CFX-Solver Manager operates.

Note
Once the second iteration appears, data begins to plot. Plotting may take a long time
depending on the amount of data to process. Let the process run.

2.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results.
1.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

2.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK. After a short pause, CFX-Solver Manager closes and CFD-Post opens.

2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace are displayed.

20

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. You can use the mouse or
the toolbar icons to manipulate the view, exactly as in CFX-Pre.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object
2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline
2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point
2.6.4. Rearranging the Point
2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend
2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane
2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry
2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views
2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes
2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane
2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane
2.6.12. Adding Contours
2.6.13. Working with Animations
2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post

2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object

The outline of the geometry is called the wireframe or outline plot.
By default, CFD-Post displays only some of the surface mesh. This sometimes means that when you first
load your results file, the geometry outline is not displayed clearly. You can control the amount of the
surface mesh shown by editing the Wireframe object listed in the Outline tree view.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

21

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

The check boxes next to each object name in the Outline control the visibility of each object. Currently
only the Wireframe and Default Legend objects have visibility turned on.
The edge angle determines how much of the surface mesh is visible. If the angle between two adjacent
faces is greater than the edge angle, then that edge is drawn. If the edge angle is set to 0, the entire
surface mesh is drawn. If the edge angle is large, then only the most significant corner edges of the
geometry are drawn.
For this geometry, a setting of approximately 15 lets you view the model location without displaying
an excessive amount of the surface mesh.
In this module you can also modify the zoom settings and view of the wireframe.
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Wireframe.

Tip
While it is not necessary to change the view to set the angle, do so to explore the
practical uses of this feature.

2.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, and
select Isometric View (Z up).

3.

In the Wireframe details view, under Definition, click in the Edge Angle box.
An embedded slider is displayed.

4.

Type a value of 10 [degree].

5.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Notice that more surface mesh is displayed.

22

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.

Drag the embedded slider to set the Edge Angle value to approximately 45 [degree].

7.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Less of the outline of the geometry is displayed.

8.

Type a value of 15 [degree].

9.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline

A streamline is the path that a particle of zero mass would follow through the domain.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu.
You can also use the toolbars to create a variety of objects. Later modules and tutorials explore
this further.

2.

Click OK.
This accepts the default name.

3.

Under Definition, ensure that Method is set to XYZ.

4.

Under Point, enter the following coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

This is a point near the first inlet.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

23

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

5.

Click Apply.
The point appears as a symbol in the viewer as a crosshair symbol.

2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point

Where applicable, streamlines can trace the flow direction forwards (downstream) and/or backwards
(upstream).
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Streamline.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Set Definition > Start From to Point 1.

Tip
To create streamlines originating from more than one location, click the Ellipsis
icon
to the right of the Start From box. This displays the Location Selector dialog box,
where you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to pick multiple locators.

4.

Click the Color tab.

5.

Set Mode to Variable.

6.

Set Variable to Total Temperature.

7.

Set Range to Local.

8.

Click Apply.
The streamline shows the path of a zero mass particle from Point 1. The temperature is initially
high near the hot inlet, but as the fluid mixes the temperature drops.

24

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.6.4. Rearranging the Point

Once created, a point can be rearranged manually or by setting specific coordinates.

Tip
In this module, you may choose to display various views and zooms from the Predefined
Camera option in the shortcut menu (such as Isometric View (Z up) or View From -X) and
by using Zoom Box
1.

if you prefer to change the display.

In Outline, under User Locations and Plots double-click Point 1.

Properties for the selected user location are displayed.

2.

Under Point, set these coordinates: -1, -2.9, 1.

3.

Click Apply.
The point is moved and the streamline redrawn.

4.

In the viewer toolbar, click Select

and ensure that the adjacent toolbar icon is set to Single Select

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

25

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

While in select mode, you cannot use the left mouse button to re-orient the object in the viewer.
5.

In the viewer, drag Point 1 (appears as a yellow addition sign) to a new location within the mixer.
The point position is updated in the details view and the streamline is redrawn at the new location.
The point moves normal in relation to the viewing direction.

6.

Click Rotate

Tip
You can also click in the viewer area, and press the space bar to toggle between Select
and Viewing Mode. A way to pick objects from Viewing Mode is to hold down Ctrl +
Shift while clicking on an object with the left mouse button.

7.

Under Point, reset these coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

8.

Click Apply.
The point appears at its original location.

9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend

You can modify the appearance of the default legend.
The default legend appears whenever a plot is created that is colored by a variable. The streamline
color is based on temperature; therefore, the legend shows the temperature range. The color pattern
on the legends color bar is banded in accordance with the bands in the plot.

Note
If a user-specified range is used for the legend, one or more bands may represent values
beyond the legends range. In this case, these band colors are extrapolated slightly past the
range of colors shown in the legend.
The default legend displays values for the last eligible plot that was opened in the details view. To
maintain a legend definition during a CFD-Post session, you can create a new legend by clicking Legend
.

26

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Because there are many settings that can be customized for the legend, this module allows you the
freedom to experiment with them. In the last steps you will set up a legend, based on the default legend,
with a minor modification to the position.

Tip
When editing values, you can restore the values that were present when you began editing
by clicking Reset. To restore the factory-default values, click Default.
1.

Double-click Default Legend View 1.

The Definition tab of the default legend is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Title Mode

User Specified

Title

Streamline Temp.

Horizontal

(Selected)

Location
> Y Justification

3.

Bottom

Click Apply.
The appearance and position of the legend changes based on the settings specified.

4.

Modify various settings in Definition and click Apply after each change.

5.

Select the Appearance tab.

6.

Modify a variety of settings in the Appearance and click Apply after each change.

7.

Click Defaults.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Under Outline, in User Locations and Plots, clear the check boxes for Point 1 and Streamline
1.
Since both are no longer visible, the associated legend no longer appears.

2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane

Defining a slice plane allows you to obtain a cross-section of the geometry.
In CFD-Post you often view results by coloring a graphic object. The graphic object could be an
isosurface, a vector plot, or in this case, a plane. The object can be a fixed color or it can vary based on
the value of a variable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

27

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

You already have some objects defined by default (listed in the Outline). You can view results on the
boundaries of the static mixer by coloring each boundary object by a variable. To view results within
the geometry (that is, on non-default locators), you will create new objects.
You can use the following methods to define a plane:
Three Points: creates a plane from three specified points.
Point and Normal: defines a plane from one point on the plane and a normal vector to the plane.
YZ Plane, ZX Plane, and XY Plane: similar to Point and Normal, except that the normal is defined
to be normal to the indicated plane.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane or click Location > Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane window, type: Slice

3.

Click OK.
The Geometry, Color, Render, and View tabs enable you to switch between settings.

4.

Click the Geometry tab.

2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry

You need to choose the vector normal to the plane. You want the plane to lie in the x-y plane, hence
its normal vector points along the z-axis. You can specify any vector that points in the Z direction, but
you will choose the most obvious (0,0,1).
1.

If required, under Geometry, expand Definition.

2.

Under Method select Point and Normal.

3.

Under Point enter 0,0,1.

4.

Under Normal enter 0,0,1.

5.

Ensure that the Plane Type > Slice is selected.

6.

Click Apply.
Slice appears under User Locations and Plots. Rotate the view to see the plane.

2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views

Depending on the view of the geometry, various objects may not appear because they fall in a 2D space
that cannot be seen.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The slice is now visible in the viewer.

28

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Zoom Box

3.

Click and drag a rectangular selection over the geometry.

4.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

5.

Click Rotate

6.

Click and drag the mouse pointer down slightly to rotate the geometry towards you.

7.

Select Isometric View (Z up) as described earlier.

2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes

Render settings determine how the plane is drawn.
1.

In the details view for Slice, select the Render tab.

2.

Clear Show Faces.

3.

Select Show Mesh Lines.

4.

Under Show Mesh Lines change Color Mode to User Specified.

5.

Click the current color in Line Color to change to a different color.

For a greater selection of colors, click the Ellipsis

icon to use the Select color dialog box.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

29

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Zoom Box

8.

Zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

The line segments show where the slice plane intersects with mesh element faces. The end points
of each line segment are located where the plane intersects mesh element edges.
9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.
The image shown below can be used for comparison with Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined
Mesh) (p. 71) (in the section Creating a Slice Plane (p. 79)), where a refined mesh is used.

2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane

The Color panel is used to determine how the object faces are colored.
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

[a]

a. You can specify the variable (in this case, temperature) used to color the graphic
element. The Constant mode allows you to color the plane with a fixed color.

30

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Apply.
Hot water (red) enters from one inlet and cold water (blue) from the other.

2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane

The plane can be moved to different locations.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Click the Geometry tab.

Review the settings in Definition under Point and under Normal.

3.

Click Single Select

4.

Click and drag the plane to a new location that intersects the domain.
As you drag the mouse, the viewer updates automatically. Note that Point updates with new settings.

5.

Set Point settings to 0,0,1.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Turn off visibility of Slice by clearing the check box next to Slice in the Outline tree view.

2.6.12. Adding Contours

Contours connect all points of equal value for a scalar variable (for example, Temperature) and help
to visualize variable values and gradients. Colored bands fill the spaces between contour lines. Each
band is colored by the average color of its two bounding contour lines (even if the latter are not displayed).
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu or click Contour

The Insert Contour dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Name to Slice Contour.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Slice

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

31

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Tab
Render

6.

Setting

Value

Variable

Temperature

Show Contour Bands

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Important
The colors of 3D graphics object faces are slightly altered when lighting is on. To view
colors with highest accuracy, go to the Render tab and, under Show Contour Bands,
clear Lighting and click Apply.
The graphic element faces are visible, producing a contour plot as shown.

Note
Make sure that the visibility for Slice (in the Outline tree view) is turned off.

2.6.13. Working with Animations

Animations build transitions between views for development of video files.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for creating a keyframe animation:
2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

32

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe
2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe
2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation
2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation
2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie

2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

The Animation dialog box is used to define keyframes and to export to a video file.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

The Animation dialog box can be repositioned as required.

2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe

Keyframes are required in order to produce an animation. You need to define the first viewer state, a
second (and final) viewer state, and set the number of interpolated intermediate frames.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, turn off the visibility of Slice Contour and
turn on the visibility of Slice.

3.

Select the Keyframe Animation toggle.

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

A new keyframe named KeyframeNo1 is created. This represents the current image displayed in
the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

33

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe

Define the second keyframe and the number of intermediate frames:
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Slice.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Point coordinate values to (0,0,-1.99).

3.

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the bottom of the mixer.

34

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

KeyframeNo2 is created and represents the image displayed in the viewer.

5.

Select KeyframeNo1.

6.

Set # of Frames (located below the list of keyframes) to 20.

This is the number of intermediate frames used when going from KeyframeNo1 to KeyframeNo2.
This number is displayed in the Frames column for KeyframeNo1.

7.

Press Enter.
The Frame # column shows the frame in which each keyframe appears. KeyframeNo1 appears
at frame 1 since it defines the start of the animation. KeyframeNo2 is at frame 22 since you have
20 intermediate frames (frames 2 to 21) in between KeyframeNo1 and KeyframeNo2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

35

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation

More keyframes could be added, but this animation has only two keyframes (which is the minimum
possible).
The controls previously grayed-out in the Animation dialog box are now available. The number of intermediate frames between keyframes is listed beside the keyframe having the lowest number of the
pair. The number of frames listed beside the last keyframe is ignored.
1.

Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.

36

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Play the animation

The animation plays from frame 1 to frame 22. It plays relatively slowly because the slice plane
must be updated for each frame.

2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation

To make the plane sweep through the whole geometry, you will set the starting position of the plane
to be at the top of the mixer. You will also modify the Range properties of the plane so that it shows
the temperature variation better. As the animation is played, you can see the hot and cold water entering
the mixer. Near the bottom of the mixer (where the water flows out) you can see that the temperature
is quite uniform. The new temperature range lets you view the mixing process more accurately than
the global range used in the first animation.
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Point

0, 0, 1.99

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the top of the static mixer.

Note
Do not double-click in the next step.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, single click (do not double-click) KeyframeNo1 to select it.
If you had double-clicked KeyFrameNo1, the plane and viewer states would have been redefined
according to the stored settings for KeyFrameNo1. If this happens, click Undo
to select the keyframe.

4.

Click Set Keyframe

and try again

The image in the viewer replaces the one previously associated with KeyframeNo1.
5.

Double-click KeyframeNo2.
The object properties for the slice plane are updated according to the settings in KeyFrameNo2.

6.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

37

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

7.

Click Apply.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, single-click KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click Set Keyframe

to save the new settings to KeyframeNo2.

2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie

1.

Click More Animation Options

to view the additional options.

The Loop and Bounce option buttons determine what happens when the animation reaches the
last keyframe. When Loop is selected, the animation repeats itself the number of times defined by
Repeat. When Bounce is selected, every other cycle is played in reverse order, starting with the
second.
2.

Select the check box next to Save Movie.

3.

Set Format to MPEG1.

4.

Click Browse

5.

Under File name type: StaticMixer.mpg

6.

If required, set the path location to a different directory.

7.

Click Save.

next to Save Movie.

The movie filename (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
8.

Click To Beginning

9.

Click Play the animation

10. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an MPEG file.
11. Click the Options button at the bottom of the Animation dialog box.
In Advanced, you can see that a Frame Rate of 24 frames per second was used to create the animation. The animation you produced contains a total of 22 frames, so it takes just under 1 second
to play in a media player.

38

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
13. Close the Animation dialog box.
14. Review the animation in third-party software as required.

2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post

When finished with CFD-Post, exit the current window:
1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

Click Quit if prompted to save.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

39

40

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 3: Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer using ANSYS Workbench.
This tutorial includes:
3.1.Tutorial Features
3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
3.3. Preparing the Working Directory
3.4. Setting Up the Project
3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using ANSYS Workbench to set up a project.
Using Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre to set up a problem.
Using ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager to obtain a solution.
Modifying the outline plot in CFD-Post.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to trace the flow field from a point.
Viewing temperature using colored planes and contours in CFD-Post.
Creating an animation and saving it as a movie file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Quick Setup mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

41

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Component
CFD-Post

Feature

Details

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Animation

Keyframe

Plots

Contour
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Point
Slice Plane
Streamline

3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.
Water enters through both pipes at the same rate but at different temperatures. The first entry is at a
rate of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K and the second entry is at a rate of 2 m/s at a temperature
of 285 K. The radius of the mixer is 2 m.
Your goal in this tutorial is to understand how to use CFX in Workbench to determine the speed and
temperature of the water when it exits the static mixer.
Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

42

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

StaticMixerMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.4. Setting Up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
17.0 > Workbench 17.0. To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface,
type the path to runwb2 (for example, ~/ansys_inc/v170/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then
press Enter.

2.

From the toolbar, click File > Save As.

3.

In the dialog box that appears, browse to the working directory, set File name to StaticMixer, and
click Save.

3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Because you are starting with an existing mesh, you can immediately use CFX-Pre to define the simulation.
To launch CFX-Pre:
1.

In the Toolbox pane, open Component Systems and double-click CFX.

A CFX system opens in the Project Schematic.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

43

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Note
You use a CFX component system because you are starting with a mesh. If you wanted
to create the geometry and mesh, you would start with a Fluid Flow (CFX) analysis
system.

2.

Right-click the blue CFX cell (A1) and select Rename.

3.

Change the name of the system to Static Mixer. Finish by pressing Enter or by clicking outside the
cell.

4.

In ANSYS Workbench, enable View > Files and View > Progress so that you can see the files that are
written and the time remaining to complete operations.

5.

In the Workbench Project Schematic, double-click the Setup cell of the CFX component system.
CFX-Pre opens.

6.

Optionally, change the background color of the viewer in CFX-Pre for improved viewing:
a.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

44

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

b.

Adjust the color settings under CFX-Pre > Graphics Style.

For example, you could set the Background > Color Type to Solid and the Color to white.

c.

Click OK.

3.5.1. Creating the Simulation Definition

Before importing and working with the mesh, you need to create a simulation; in this example, you will
use Quick Setup mode. Quick Setup mode provides a simple wizard-like interface for setting up simple
cases. This is useful for getting familiar with the basic elements of a CFD problem setup.
1.

In CFX-Pre, select Tools > Quick Setup Mode.

The Quick Setup Wizard opens, enabling you to define this single-phase simulation.

2.

Under Working Fluid > Fluid select Water.

This is a fluid already defined in the library of materials as water at 25C.

3.

Under Mesh Data > Mesh File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

4.

Under Files of type, select CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx).

5.

From your working directory, select StaticMixerMesh.gtm.

6.

Click Open.
The mesh loads, which enables you to apply physics.

7.

Click Next.

3.5.2. Setting the Physics Definition

You need to define the type of flow and the physical models to use in the fluid domain.
The flow is steady-state and you will specify the turbulence and heat transfer. Turbulence is modeled
using the - turbulence model and heat transfer using the thermal energy model. The - turbulence
model is a commonly used model and is suitable for a wide range of applications. The thermal energy
model neglects high speed energy effects and is therefore suitable for low speed flow applications.
1.

Under Model Data, note that the Reference Pressure is set to 1 [atm].
All other pressure settings are relative to this reference pressure.

2.

Set Heat Transfer to Thermal Energy.

3.

Leave Turbulence at its default setting, k-Epsilon.

4.

Click Next.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

45

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.5.3. Defining Boundaries

The CFD model requires the definition of conditions on the boundaries of the domain.
1.

Delete Inlet and Outlet from the list by right-clicking each and selecting Delete Boundary.

2.

Right-click in the blank area where Inlet and Outlet were listed, then select Add Boundary.

3.

Set Name to in1.

4.

Click OK.
The boundary is created and, when selected, properties related to the boundary are displayed.

3.5.4. Setting Boundary Data

Once boundaries are created, you need to create associated data. Based on Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with
2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 42), you will define the velocity and temperature for the first inlet.
1.

Set in1 > Boundary Type to Inlet.

2.

Set Location to in1.

3.

Set the Flow Specification > Option to Normal Speed and set Normal Speed to: 2 [m s^-1]

4.

Set the Temperature Specification > Static Temperature to 315 [K] (note the units).

3.5.5. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition

Based on Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 42), you know the second inlet
boundary condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 285 K at one of the side inlets.
You will define that now.
1.

Under the Boundary Definition panel, right-click in the selector area and select Add Boundary.

2.

Create a new boundary named in2 with these settings:

Setting

Value

in2
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in2
> Location

in2

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

46

285 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.5.6. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition

Now that the second inlet boundary has been created, the same concepts can be applied to building
the outlet boundary.
1.

Create a new boundary named out with these settings:

Setting

Value

out
> Boundary Type

Outlet

out
> Location

out

Flow Specification
> Option

Average Static Pressure

Flow Specification
> Relative Pressure

2.

0 [Pa]

Click Next.

3.5.7. Moving to General Mode

There are no further boundary conditions that need to be set. All 2D exterior regions that have not
been assigned to a boundary condition are automatically assigned to the default boundary condition.
1.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.
The three boundary conditions are displayed in the viewer as sets of arrows at the boundary surfaces.
Inlet boundary arrows are directed into the domain. Outlet boundary arrows are directed out of
the domain.

3.5.8. Using the Viewer

Now that the simulation is loaded, take a moment to explore how you can use the viewer toolbar to
zoom in or out and to rotate the object in the viewer.

3.5.8.1. Using the Zoom Tools

There are several icons available for controlling the level of zoom in the viewer.
1.

Click Zoom Box

2.

Click and drag a rectangular box over the geometry.

3.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

47

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

The geometry zoom changes to display the selection at a greater resolution.
4.

Click Fit View

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

3.5.8.2. Rotating the Geometry

If you need to rotate an object or to view it from a new angle, you can use the viewer toolbar.
1.

Click Rotate

on the viewer toolbar.

2.

Click and drag within the geometry repeatedly to test the rotation of the geometry.
The geometry rotates based on the direction of mouse movement and based on the initial mouse
cursor shape, which changes depending on where the mouse cursor is in the viewer. If the mouse
drag starts near a corner of the viewer window, the motion of the geometry will be constrained
to rotation about a single axis, as indicated by the mouse cursor shape.

3.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z Up).
A clearer view of the mesh is displayed.

48

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

3.5.9. Setting Solver Control

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical solution generation process.
While an upwind advection scheme is less accurate than other advection schemes, it is also more robust.
This advection scheme is suitable for obtaining an initial set of results, but in general should not be
used to obtain final accurate results.
The time scale can be calculated automatically by the solver or set manually. The Automatic option
tends to be conservative, leading to reliable, but often slow, convergence. It is often possible to accelerate convergence by applying a time scale factor or by choosing a manual value that is more aggressive
than the Automatic option. In this tutorial, you will select a physical time scale, leading to convergence
that is twice as fast as the Automatic option.
1.

In the CFX-Pre toolbar, click Solver Control

2.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Advection Scheme > Option to Upwind.

3.

Set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control to Physical Timescale
and set the physical timescale value to 2 [s].

4.

Click OK.

3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

To obtain a solution, you need to launch the CFX-Solver Manager and subsequently use it to start the
solver:
1.

Double-click the ANSYS Workbench Solution cell. The CFX-Solver Manager appears with the Define Run
dialog box displayed.
The Define Run dialog box enables configuration of a run for processing by CFX-Solver. In this
case, all of the information required to perform a new serial run (on a single processor) is entered
automatically. You do not need to alter the information in the Define Run dialog box.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver launches and a split screen appears and displays the results of the run graphically and
as text. The panes continue to build as CFX-Solver Manager operates.
One window shows the convergence history plots and the other displays text output from CFXSolver. The text lists physical properties, boundary conditions, and various other parameters used
or calculated in creating the model. All the text is written to the output file automatically (in this
case, StaticMixer_001.out).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

49

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Note
Once the second iteration appears, data begins to plot. Plotting may take a long time
depending on the amount of data to process. Let the process run.

50

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFX-Solver is finished, a message is displayed and the final line in the .out file (which you can
see in the CFX-Solver Manager) is:
This run of the ANSYS CFX Solver has finished.

3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results:
1.

In ANSYS Workbench, right-click the Results cell and select Refresh.

2.

When the refresh is complete, double-click the Results cell. CFD-Post appears.

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace are displayed. Optionally, change the background color of the viewer for improved viewing:
1.

In CFD-Post, select Edit > Options. The Options dialog box appears.

2.

Adjust the color settings under CFD-Post > Viewer. For example, you could set the Background > Color
Type to Solid and the Color to white.

3.

Click OK.

The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. You can use the mouse or
the toolbar icons to manipulate the view, exactly as in CFX-Pre.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

51

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object
3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline
3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point
3.7.4. Rearranging the Point
3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend
3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane
3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry
3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views
3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes
3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane
3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane
3.7.12. Adding Contours
3.7.13. Working with Animations
3.7.14. Closing the Applications

3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object

The outline of the geometry is called the wireframe or outline plot.
By default, CFD-Post displays only some of the surface mesh. This sometimes means that when you first
load your results file, the geometry outline is not displayed clearly. You can control the amount of the
surface mesh shown by editing the Wireframe object listed in the Outline.
The check boxes next to each object name in the Outline tree view control the visibility of each object.
Currently only the Wireframe and Default Legend objects have visibility turned on.
The edge angle determines how much of the surface mesh is visible. If the angle between two adjacent
faces is greater than the edge angle, then that edge is drawn. If the edge angle is set to 0, the entire
surface mesh is drawn. If the edge angle is large, then only the most significant corner edges of the
geometry are drawn.
For this geometry, a setting of approximately 15 lets you view the model location without displaying
an excessive amount of the surface mesh.
In this module you can also modify the zoom settings and view of the wireframe.
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Wireframe.

2.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, and
select Isometric View (Z up).

Tip
While it is not necessary to change the view to set the edge angle for the wireframe,
doing so enables you to explore the practical uses of this feature.

3.

In the Wireframe details view, under Definition, click in the Edge Angle box.
An embedded slider is displayed.

4.

Type a value of 10 [degree].

5.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

52

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Notice that more surface mesh is displayed.

6.

Drag the embedded slider to set the Edge Angle value to approximately 45 [degree].

7.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Less of the outline of the geometry is displayed.

8.

Type a value of 15 [degree].

9.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline

A streamline is the path that a particle of zero mass would follow through the domain.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu.
You can also use the toolbars to create a variety of objects. Later modules and tutorials will explore
this further.

2.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

53

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

This accepts the default name.
3.

Set Definition > Method to XYZ.

4.

Under Point, enter the following coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

This is a point near the first inlet.

5.

Click Apply.
The point appears as a symbol in the viewer as a crosshair symbol.

3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point

Where applicable, streamlines can trace the flow direction forwards (downstream) and/or backwards
(upstream).
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Streamline.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Set Definition > Start From to Point 1.

Tip
To create streamlines originating from more than one location, click the Ellipsis
icon
to the right of the Start From box. This displays the Location Selector dialog box,
where you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to pick multiple locators.

4.

Click the Color tab.

5.

Set Mode to Variable.

6.

Set Variable to Total Temperature.

7.

Set Range to Local.

8.

Click Apply.
The streamline shows the path of a zero mass particle from Point 1. The temperature is initially
high near the hot inlet, but as the fluid mixes the temperature drops.

54

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.7.4. Rearranging the Point

Once created, a point can be rearranged manually or by setting specific coordinates.

Tip
In this module, you may choose to display various views and zooms from the Predefined
Camera option in the shortcut menu (such as Isometric View (Z up) or View From -X) and
by using Zoom Box
1.

if you prefer to change the display.

In Outline, under User Locations and Plots double-click Point 1.

Properties for the selected user location are displayed.

2.

Under Point, set these coordinates: -1, -2.9, 1.

3.

Click Apply.
The point is moved and the streamline redrawn.

4.

In the viewer toolbar, click Select

and ensure that the adjacent toolbar icon is set to Single Select

.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

55

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

While in select mode, you cannot use the left mouse button to re-orient the object in the viewer.
5.

In the viewer, drag Point 1 (appears as a yellow addition sign) to a new location within the mixer.
The point position is updated in the details view and the streamline is redrawn at the new location.
The point moves normal in relation to the viewing direction.

6.

Click Rotate

Tip
You can also click in the viewer area, and press the space bar to toggle between Select
and Viewing Mode. A way to pick objects from Viewing Mode is to hold down Ctrl +
Shift while clicking on an object with the left mouse button.

7.

Under Point, reset these coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

8.

Click Apply.
The point appears at its original location.

9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend

You can modify the appearance of the default legend.
The default legend appears whenever a plot is created that is colored by a variable. The streamline
color is based on temperature; therefore, the legend shows the temperature range. The color pattern
on the legends color bar is banded in accordance with the bands in the plot.

Note
If a user-specified range is used for the legend, one or more bands may represent values
beyond the legends range. In this case, these band colors are extrapolated slightly past the
range of colors shown in the legend.
The default legend displays values for the last eligible plot that was opened in the details view. To
maintain a legend definition during a CFD-Post session, you can create a new legend by clicking Legend
.

56

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Because there are many settings that can be customized for the legend, this module allows you the
freedom to experiment with them. In the last steps you will set up a legend, based on the default legend,
with a minor modification to the position.

Tip
When editing values, you can restore the values that were present when you began editing
by clicking Reset. To restore the factory-default values, click Default.
1.

Double-click Default Legend View 1.

The Definition tab of the default legend is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Title Mode

User Specified

Title

Streamline Temp.

Horizontal

(Selected)

Location
> Y Justification

3.

Bottom

Click Apply.
The appearance and position of the legend changes based on the settings specified.

4.

Modify various settings in Definition and click Apply after each change.

5.

Select Appearance.

6.

Modify a variety of settings in the Appearance and click Apply after each change.

7.

Click Defaults.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Under Outline, in User Locations and Plots, clear the check boxes for Point 1 and Streamline
1.
Since both are no longer visible, the associated legend no longer appears.

3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane

Defining a slice plane allows you to obtain a cross-section of the geometry.
In CFD-Post you often view results by coloring a graphic object. The graphic object could be an
isosurface, a vector plot, or in this case, a plane. The object can be a fixed color or it can vary based on
the value of a variable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

57

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

You already have some objects defined by default (listed in the Outline). You can view results on the
boundaries of the static mixer by coloring each boundary object by a variable. To view results within
the geometry (that is, on non-default locators), you will create new objects.
You can use the following methods to define a plane:
Three Points: creates a plane from three specified points.
Point and Normal: defines a plane from one point on the plane and a normal vector to the plane.
YZ Plane, ZX Plane, and XY Plane: similar to Point and Normal, except that the normal is defined
to be normal to the indicated plane.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane or click Location > Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane window, type: Slice

3.

Click OK.
The details view for the plane appears; the Geometry, Color, Render, and View tabs enable you
to configure the characteristics of the plane.

3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry

You need to choose the vector normal to the plane. You want the plane to lie in the x-y plane, hence
its normal vector points along the Z axis. You can specify any vector that points in the Z direction, but
you will choose the most obvious (0,0,1).
1.

On the Geometry tab, expand Definition.

2.

Under Method select Point and Normal.

3.

Under Point enter 0,0,1.

4.

Under Normal enter 0,0,1.

5.

Click Apply.
Slice appears under User Locations and Plots. Rotate the view to see the plane.

3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views

Depending on the view of the geometry, various objects may not appear because they fall in a 2D space
that cannot be seen.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The slice is now visible in the viewer.

58

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Zoom Box

3.

Click and drag a rectangular selection over the geometry.

4.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

5.

Click Rotate

6.

Click and drag the mouse pointer down slightly to rotate the geometry towards you.

7.

Select Isometric View (Z up) as described earlier.

3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes

Render settings determine how the plane is drawn.
1.

In the details view for Slice, select the Render tab.

2.

Clear Show Faces.

3.

Select Show Mesh Lines.

4.

Under Show Mesh Lines change Color Mode to User Specified.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

59

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

5.

Click the current color in Line Color to change to a different color.

For a greater selection of colors, click the Ellipsis

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Zoom Box

8.

Zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

icon to use the Color selector dialog box.

The line segments show where the slice plane intersects with mesh element faces. The end points
of each line segment are located where the plane intersects mesh element edges.
9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.
The image shown below can be used for comparison with Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined
Mesh) (p. 71) (in the section Creating a Slice Plane (p. 79)), where a refined mesh is used.

3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane

The Color panel is used to determine how the object faces are colored.
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

60

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

a. You can specify the variable (in this case, temperature) used to color the graphic
element. The Constant mode allows you to color the plane with a fixed color.

2.

Click Apply.
Hot water (red) enters from one inlet and cold water (blue) from the other.

3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane

You can move the plane to different locations:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Click the Geometry tab.

Review the settings in Definition under Point and under Normal.

3.

Click Single Select

4.

Click and drag the plane to a new location that intersects the domain.
As you drag the mouse, the viewer updates automatically. Note that Point updates with new settings.

5.

Type in Point settings of 0,0,1.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Turn off the visibility for Slice by clearing the check box next to Slice in the Outline tree view.

3.7.12. Adding Contours

Contours connect all points of equal value for a scalar variable (for example, Temperature) and help
to visualize variable values and gradients. Colored bands fill the spaces between contour lines. Each
band is colored by the average color of its two bounding contour lines (even if the latter are not displayed).
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu or click Contour

The Insert Contour dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Name to Slice Contour.

4.

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

61

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Slice

Variable

Temperature

Show Contour Lines

(Selected)

Render

6.

Click Apply.

Important
The colors of 3D graphics object faces are slightly altered when lighting is on. To view
colors with highest accuracy, go to the Render tab and, under Show Faces, clear
Lighting and click Apply.
The graphic element faces are visible, producing a contour plot as shown.

Note
Make sure that the visibility of Slice (in the Outline tree view) is turned off.

62

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.7.13. Working with Animations

Animations build transitions between views for development of video files.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for creating a keyframe animation:
3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box
3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe
3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe
3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation
3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation
3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie

3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

The Animation dialog box is used to define keyframes and to export to a video file.
1.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

2.

Select Keyframe Animation.

3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe

Keyframes are required in order to produce a keyframe animation. You need to define the first viewer
state, a second (and final) viewer state, and set the number of interpolated intermediate frames.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, turn off the visibility of Slice Contour and
turn on the visibility of Slice.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

A new keyframe named KeyframeNo1 is created. This represents the current image displayed in
the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

63

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe

Define the second keyframe and the number of intermediate frames:
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Slice.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Point coordinate values to (0,0,-1.99).

3.

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the bottom of the mixer.

64

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

KeyframeNo2 is created and represents the image displayed in the viewer.

5.

Select KeyframeNo1 so that you can set the number of frames to be interpolated between the two
keyframes.

6.

Set # of Frames (located below the list of keyframes) to 20.

This is the number of intermediate frames used when going from KeyframeNo1 to KeyframeNo2.
This number is displayed in the Frames column for KeyframeNo1.

7.

Press Enter.
The Frame # column shows the frame in which each keyframe appears. KeyframeNo1 appears
at frame 1 since it defines the start of the animation. KeyframeNo2 is at frame 22 since you have
20 intermediate frames (frames 2 to 21) in between KeyframeNo1 and KeyframeNo2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

65

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation

More keyframes could be added, but this animation has only two keyframes (which is the minimum
possible).
The controls previously grayed-out in the Animation dialog box are now available. The number of intermediate frames between keyframes is listed beside the keyframe having the lowest number of the
pair. The number of frames listed beside the last keyframe is ignored.
1.

Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.

66

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Play the animation

The animation plays from frame 1 to frame 22. It plays relatively slowly because the slice plane
must be updated for each frame.

3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation

To make the plane sweep through the whole geometry, you will set the starting position of the plane
to be at the top of the mixer. You will also modify the Range properties of the plane so that it shows
the temperature variation better. As the animation is played, you can see the hot and cold water entering
the mixer. Near the bottom of the mixer (where the water flows out) you can see that the temperature
is quite uniform. The new temperature range lets you view the mixing process more accurately than
the global range used in the first animation.
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Point

0, 0, 1.99

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the top of the static mixer.

Note
Do not double-click in the next step.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, single click (do not double-click) KeyframeNo1 to select it.
If you had double-clicked KeyFrameNo1, the plane and viewer states would have been redefined
according to the stored settings for KeyFrameNo1. If this happens, click Undo
to select the keyframe.

4.

Click Set Keyframe

and try again

The image in the viewer replaces the one previously associated with KeyframeNo1.
5.

Double-click KeyframeNo2.
The object properties for the slice plane are updated according to the settings in KeyFrameNo2.

6.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

67

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

7.

Click Apply.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, single-click KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click Set Keyframe

to save the new settings to KeyframeNo2.

3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie

1.

Click More Animation Options

to view the additional options.

The Loop and Bounce option buttons determine what happens when the animation reaches the
last keyframe. When Loop is selected, the animation repeats itself the number of times defined by
Repeat. When Bounce is selected, every other cycle is played in reverse order, starting with the
second.
2.

Select Save Movie.

3.

Set Format to MPEG1.

4.

Click Browse

5.

Under File name type: StaticMixer.mpg

6.

If required, set the path location to a different directory. You may want to set the directory to your working
directory so that the animation will be in the same location as the project files.

7.

Click Save.

next to Save Movie.

The movie filename (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
8.

Click To Beginning

9.

Click Play the animation

10. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an MPEG file.
11. Click the Options button at the bottom of the Animation dialog box.
In Advanced, you can see that a Frame Rate of 24 frames per second was used to create the animation. The animation you produced contains a total of 22 frames, so it takes just under 1 second
to play in a media player.
68

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
13. Close the Animation dialog box.
14. View the animation using a media player.

3.7.14. Closing the Applications

Before you close the project, take a moment to look at the files listed in the Files view. You will see
the project file, StaticMixer.wbpj, and the files that ANSYS Workbench created (such as CFXSolver Input, CFX-Solver Output, CFX-Solver Results, CFX-Pre Case, CFD-Post State, and Design Point
files).
Close ANSYS Workbench (and the applications it launched) by selecting File > Exit from ANSYS Workbench. ANSYS Workbench prompts you to save all of your project files.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

69

70

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 4: Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

This tutorial includes:
4.1.Tutorial Features
4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
4.3. Preparing the Working Directory
4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using the General mode of CFX-Pre (this mode is used for more complex cases).
Rerunning a problem with a refined mesh.
Importing a CCL (CFX Command Language) file to copy the definition of a different simulation into the
current simulation.
Viewing the mesh with a Sphere Volume locator and a Surface Plot.
Using the Report Viewer to analyze mesh quality.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Slice Plane
Sphere Volume

Other

Viewing the Mesh

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

71

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, you use a refined mesh to obtain a better solution to the Static Mixer problem created
in Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9). You establish a general
workflow for analyzing the flow of fluid into and out of a mixer. This tutorial uses a specific problem
to teach the general approach taken when working with an existing mesh.

You start a new simulation in CFX-Pre and import the refined mesh. This tutorial introduces General
mode (the mode used for most tutorials) in CFX-Pre. The physics for this tutorial are the same as for
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9); therefore, you can import the
physics settings used in that tutorial to save time.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

4.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

72

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm
StaticMixer.def
StaticMixer_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial follows this general workflow for setting up the case in CFX-Pre:
4.4.1. Importing a Mesh
4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1
4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings
4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting
4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters
4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run StaticMixerRef.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 77).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General in the New Case dialog box and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type StaticMixerRef and click Save.

4.4.1. Importing a Mesh

At least one mesh must be imported before physics are applied.
1.

Select File > Import > Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

73

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

Setting

Value

File name

StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm

[a]

a. This mesh is more refined than the one used in the other Static Mixer tutorials
(StaticMixerMesh.gtm).

3.

Click Open.
The Mesh tree shows the regions in the StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm assembly in a tree structure.
The first tree branch displays the 3D regions and the level below each 3D region shows the 2D
regions associated with it. The check box next to each item in the Mesh tree indicates the visibility
status of the object in the viewer; you can click these to toggle visibility.

Note
An assembly is a group of mesh regions that are topologically connected. Each assembly
can contain only one mesh, but multiple assemblies are permitted.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1

Because the physics and region names for this simulation are very similar to that for Tutorial 1, you can
save time by importing the settings used there. You will be importing CCL from Tutorial 1 that contains
settings that reference mesh regions. For example, the outlet boundary condition references the mesh
region named out. In this tutorial, the name of the mesh regions are the same as in Tutorial 1, so you
can import the CCL without error.
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

2.

Under Import Method, select Replace.

Replace is useful if you have defined physics and want to update or replace them with newly imported physics.

3.

Under Files of type, select CFX-Solver input files (*def *res).

4.

Select StaticMixer.def created in Tutorial 1. If you did not work through Tutorial 1, you can obtain
this file from the ANSYS Customer Portal.

5.

Click Open.

6.

View the Outline tab.

74

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tree view displays a summary of the current simulation in a tree structure. Some items may
be recognized from Tutorial 1; for example the boundary condition objects in1, in2, and out.

Note
If you import CCL that references nonexistent mesh regions, you will get errors.
A number of file types can be used as sources to import CCL, including:
Simulation files (*.cfx)
Results files (*.res)
CFX-Solver input files (*.def)
The physics for a simulation can be saved to a CCL file at any time by selecting File > Export >
CCL.

4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings

It is useful to review the options available in General mode.
Various domain settings can be set. These include:
Basic Settings
Specifies the location of the domain, coordinate frame settings and the fluids/solids that are present
in the domain. You also reference pressure, buoyancy and whether the domain is stationary or rotating.
Mesh motion can also be set.
Fluid Models
Sets models that apply to the fluid(s) in the domain, such as heat transfer, turbulence, combustion,
and radiation models. An option absent in Tutorial 1 is Turbulent Wall Functions, which is set to
Scalable. Wall functions model the flow in the near-wall region. For the k-epsilon turbulence model,
you should always use scalable wall functions.
Initialization
Sets the initial conditions for the current domain only. This is generally used when multiple domains
exist to enable setting different initial conditions in each domain, but can also be used to initialize
single-domain simulations. Global initialization allows the specification of initial conditions for all
domains that do not have domain-specific initialization.
1.

On the Outline tree view, under Simulation > Flow Analysis 1, double-click Default Domain.
The domain Default Domain is opened for editing.

2.

Click the Basic Settings tab and review, but do not change, the current settings.

3.

Click Fluid Models and review, but do not change, the current settings.

4.

Click Initialization and review, but do not change, the current settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

75

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

5.

Click Close.

4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting

For the k-epsilon turbulence model, you must specify the turbulent nature of the flow entering through
the inlet boundary. For this simulation, the default setting of Medium (Intensity = 5%) is used.
This is a sensible setting if you do not know the turbulence properties of the incoming flow.
1.

Under Default Domain, double-click in1.

2.

Click the Boundary Details tab and review the settings for Flow Regime, Mass and Momentum, Turbulence and Heat Transfer.

3.

Click Close.

4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical-solution generation process.
In Tutorial 1 you set some solver control parameters, such as Advection Scheme and Timescale Control,
while other parameters were set automatically by CFX-Pre.
In this tutorial, High Resolution is used for the advection scheme. This is more accurate than the Upwind
Scheme used in Tutorial 1. You usually require a smaller time step when using this model. You can also
expect the solution to take a higher number of iterations to converge when using this model.
1.

Select Insert > Solver > Solver Control from the menu bar or click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

[a]

150

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.5 [s]

a. If your solution does not meet the convergence criteria after this number of time
steps, the CFX-Solver will stop.

76

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click the Advanced Options tab.

Tip
To select Advanced Options you may need to click the navigation icons next to the
tabs to move forward or backward through the various tabs.

5.

Ensure that Global Dynamic Model Control is selected.

6.

Click OK.

4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

Once all boundaries are created you move from CFX-Pre into CFX-Solver.
The simulation file, StaticMixerRef.cfx, contains the simulation definition in a format that can
be loaded by CFX-Pre, enabling you to complete (if applicable), restore, and modify the simulation
definition. The simulation file differs from the CFX-Solver input file in two important ways:
The simulation file can be saved at any time while defining the simulation.
The CFX-Solver input file is an encapsulated set of meshes and CCL defining a solver run, and is a subset of
the data in the simulation file.
1.

Click Define Run

The Write Solver Input File dialog box is displayed.

2.

If required, set the path to your working directory.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

File name

StaticMixerRef.def

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (StaticMixerRef.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically
starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

5.

If you are notified in CFX-Pre that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

6.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Two windows are displayed when CFX-Solver Manager runs. There is an adjustable split between the
windows that is oriented either horizontally or vertically, depending on the aspect ratio of the entire
CFX-Solver Manager window (also adjustable).
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

77

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

The tutorial follows this general workflow for generating the solution in CFX-Solver Manager:
4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File
4.5.2. Confirming Results
4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File

In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box is visible and Solver Input File has automatically
been set to the CFX-Solver input file from CFX-Pre: StaticMixerRef.def.
Configure the settings so that the results from Tutorial 1 (contained in StaticMixer_001.res) will
be used to initialize the solution:
1.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

2.

Set Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 > Initial Values 1 Settings > File
Name to StaticMixer_001.res.
If you did not complete the first tutorial, you can use StaticMixer_001.res from your working
directory.

3.

Set Use Mesh From to Solver Input File.

4.

Clear Initial Values Specification > Continue History From.

This will cause the CFX-Solver to use the results in the StaticMixer_001.res file as a basic
initial guess for the solution, and will cause the iteration count to start from 1 instead of from the
last iteration number in the initial values file.

5.

Click Start Run.

Note
Convergence information is plotted once the second outer loop iteration is complete.

4.5.2. Confirming Results

When the run is finished, specific information appears in the text window of CFX-Solver Manager.
To confirm that results interpolation was successful, look in the text window in CFX-Solver Manager.
The following text appears before the convergence history begins:
+----------------------------------------------------------+
| Initial Conditions Supplied by Fields in the Input Files |
+----------------------------------------------------------+

This lists the variables that were interpolated from the results file.
After the final iteration, a message similar to the following content appears in a message window:
StaticMixerRef_001 has completed normally.
Run concluded at: Fri Nov 27 11:57:57 2009

This indicates that CFX-Solver has successfully calculated the solution for the problem to the specified
accuracy or has run out of coefficient loops.
78

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

In the Solver Run Finished Normally window, ensure that the check box next to Post-Process Results
is cleared to prevent CFD-Post from launching at this time.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Review the CFX-Solver Manager's Out File tab for details on the run results.

4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results.
1.

On the CFX-Solver Manager, select Tools > Post-Process Results or click Post-Process Results
toolbar.

2.

In the Start CFD-Post dialog box, next to Results File, ensure that StaticMixerRef_001.res is set.
If it is not, click Browse

3.

in the

and select StaticMixerRef_001.res (located in the working directory).

If using CFX-Solver in stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

This forces stand-alone CFX-Solver to close. This option is not required in Workbench.

4.

Click OK.
After a short pause, CFD-Post starts.

4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In the following sections, you will explore the differences between the mesh and the results from this
tutorial and Tutorial 1.

4.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane

More information exists for use by CFD-Post in this tutorial than in Tutorial 1 because the slice plane is
more detailed.
Once a new slice plane is created it can be compared with Tutorial 1. There are three noticeable differences between the two slice planes.
Around the edges of the mixer geometry there are several layers of narrow rectangles. This is the region
where the mesh contains prismatic elements (which are created as inflation layers). The bulk of the geometry
contains tetrahedral elements.
There are more lines on the plane than there were in Tutorial 1. This is because the slice plane intersects
with more mesh elements.
The curves of the mixer are smoother than in Tutorial 1 because the finer mesh better represents the true
geometry.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane or under Location, click Plane.

3.

In the Insert Plane dialog box, type Slice and click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

79

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

The Geometry, Color, Render and View tabs enable you to switch between settings.
4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Domains

Default Domain

Definition
> Method

XY Plane

Definition

Render

>Z

1 [m]

Plane Type

Slice

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

7.

If necessary, click Zoom Box

8.

Compare the on-screen image with the equivalent picture from Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using
CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9) (in the section Rendering Slice Planes (p. 29)).

and zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

4.6.2. Coloring the Slice Plane

Here, you will color the plane by temperature.

80

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode [a]

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

Global

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

a. A mode setting of Constant would enable you to color the plane with a fixed
color.

2.

Click Apply.

4.6.3. Loading Results from Tutorial 1 for Comparison

In CFD-Post, you may load multiple results files into the same instance for comparison.
1.

To load the results file from Tutorial 1, select File > Load Results or click Load Results

2.

(Do not click Open until instructed to do so.) In the Load Results File dialog box, select StaticMixer_001.res from your working directory.

3.

On the right side of the dialog box, there are three frames:
Case options
Additional actions
CFX run history and multi-configuration options.
Under Case options, select Keep current cases loaded and ensure that Open in new view is selected.

4.

Under Additional actions, ensure that the Clear user state before loading check box is cleared.

5.

Under CFX run history and multi-configuration options, ensure that Load only the last results is selected.

6.

Click Open to load the results.

In the tree view, there is now a second group of domains, meshes and boundary conditions with
the heading StaticMixer_001.
In the 3D Viewer, there are two viewports named View 1 and View 2; the former shows StaticMixer_001 and the latter shows StaticMixerRef_001.

7.

Double-click the Wireframe object under User Locations and Plots.

8.

In the Definition tab, set Edge Angle to 5 [degree].

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

81

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

9.

Click Apply.

10. Click Synchronize camera in displayed views

so that all viewports maintain the same camera position.

11. Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
Both meshes are now displayed in a line along the Y axis. Notice that one mesh is of a higher resolution than the other.
12. Set Edge Angle to 30 [degree].
13. Click Apply.

4.6.4. Comparing Slice Planes Using Multiple Views

The visibility status of each object is maintained separately for each viewport. This allows some planes
to be shown while others are hidden. However, you can also use the Synchronize visibility in displayed
views

to synchronize the visibility of objects that you add.

1.

Under User Locations and Plots, select the check box beside Slice.

2.

Right-click in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.
Note the difference in temperature distribution.

3.

In the viewer toolbar, click Synchronize visibility in displayed views

4.

Click in View 1 in the 3D Viewer, then clear the visibility check box for Slice in the Outline tree view.

5.

Click in View 2. Note that the visibility check box for Slice has been re-selected as it describes the state
of the plane for View 2. Clear the visibility check box for Slice in this view.

6.

To return to a single viewport, select the option with a single rectangle.

7.

Ensure that the visibility check box for Slice is cleared.

8.

Right-click StaticMixer_001 in the tree view and select Unload.

82

to deselect the option.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.6.5. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Outlet

In this part of the tutorial, you will view the mesh on the outlet. You will see five layers of inflated elements against the wall. You will also see the triangular faces of the tetrahedral elements closer to the
center of the outlet.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the tree view, ensure that the visibility check box for StaticMixerRef_001 > Default Domain
> out is selected, then double-click out to open it for editing.
Because the boundary location geometry was defined in CFX-Pre, the details view does not display
a Geometry tab as it did for the planes.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh
Lines

(Selected)

Color Mode

User Specified

Line Color

(Select any light

color)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click Zoom Box

6.

Zoom in on the geometry to view out in greater detail.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Rotate the image as required to clearly see the mesh.

on the Viewing Tools toolbar.

4.6.6. Looking at the Inflated Elements in Three Dimensions

To show more clearly what effect inflation has on the shape of the elements, you will use volume objects
to show two individual elements. The first element that will be shown is a normal tetrahedral element;
the second is a prismatic element from an inflation layer of the mesh.
Leave the surface mesh on the outlet visible to help see how surface and volume meshes are related.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume or, under Location click Volume.

2.

In the Insert Volume dialog box, type Tet Volume and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

83

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

Tab

Setting

Value

> Method

Sphere

Definition
> Point

[a]

0.08, 0, -2

Definition
> Radius

0.14 [m]

Definition
> Mode

Below
Intersection

Inclusive [b]

(Cleared)

Color

Color

Red

Render

Show Faces
> Transparency

0.3

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

Grey

a. The z sliders minimum value corresponds to the minimum z value of the entire
geometry, which, in this case, occurs at the outlet.
b. Only elements that are entirely contained within the sphere volume will be
included.

4.

Click Apply to create the volume object.

5.

Right-click Tet Volume and choose Duplicate.

6.

In the Duplicate Tet Volume dialog box, type Prism Volume and click OK.

7.

Double-click Prism Volume.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Point

84

Value

-0.22, 0.4, -1.85

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Color

9.

> Radius

0.206 [m]

Color

Orange

Click Apply.

4.6.7. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Mixer Body

1.

Double-click the Default Domain Default object.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Line Width

Click Apply.

4.6.8. Viewing the Layers of Inflated Elements on a Plane

You will see the layers of inflated elements on the wall of the main body of the mixer. Within the body
of the mixer, there will be many lines that are drawn wherever the face of a mesh element intersects
the slice plane.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane or under Location, click Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane dialog box, type Slice 2 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

YZ Plane

Definition

Render

>X

0 [m]

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Turn off the visibility of all objects except Slice 2.

6.

To see the plane clearly, right-click in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

85

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

4.6.9. Viewing the Mesh Statistics

You can use the Report Viewer to check the quality of your mesh. For example, you can load a .def
file into CFD-Post and check the mesh quality before running the .def file in the solver.
1.

Click the Report Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).
A report appears. Look at the table shown in the Mesh Report section.

2.

Double-click Report > Mesh Report in the Outline tree view.

3.

In the Mesh Report details view, select Statistics > Maximum Face Angle.

4.

Click Refresh Preview.

Note that a new table, showing the maximum face angle for all elements in the mesh, has been
added to the Mesh Report section of the report. The maximum face angle is reported as 148.95.

As a result of generating this mesh statistic for the report, a new variable, Maximum Face Angle,
has been created and stored at every node. This variable will be used in the next section.

4.6.10. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle

In this section, you will visualize the mesh elements that have a Maximum Face Angle value greater
than 140.
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

3.

In the Outline tree view, select the visibility check box of Wireframe.

4.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume or under Location, click Volume.

5.

In the Insert Volume dialog box, type Max Face Angle Volume and click OK.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Maximum Face
Angle

[a]

Definition
> Mode

Above Value

Definition

86

> Value

140 [degree]

Inclusive [b]

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

a. Select Maximum Face Angle from the larger list of variables available by
clicking

to the right of the Variable box.

b. This includes any elements that have at least one node with a variable value
greater than or equal to the given value.

7.

Click Apply.
The volume object appears in the viewer.

4.6.11. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle Using a Point
Next, you will create a point object to show a node that has the maximum value of Maximum Face
Angle. The point object will be represented by a 3D yellow crosshair symbol. In order to avoid obscuring
the point object with the volume object, you may want to turn off the visibility of the latter.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point or under Location, click Point.

2.

Click OK to use the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Variable Maximum

Definition
> Location

Default Domain

Definition

Symbol

4.

> Variable

Maximum Face
Angle

Symbol Size

Click Apply.

4.6.12. Quitting CFD-Post

1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

If prompted by a dialog box, save the state at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

87

88

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 5: Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

This tutorial includes:
5.1.Tutorial Features
5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
5.3. Preparing the Working Directory
5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Applying a profile boundary using data stored in a file.
Visualizing the velocity on a boundary in CFX-Pre.
Using the CFX Expression Language (CEL) to describe temperature-dependent fluid properties in CFX-Pre.
Using the k-epsilon turbulence model.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to track flow through the domain.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Boundary Profile
Visualization
Inlet (Profile)
Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Default Locators

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

89

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Component

Feature

Details
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Slice Plane
Streamline

Other

Changing the Color Range

Expression Details View
Legend
Viewing the Mesh

5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to understand the general approach taken when working with an existing
mesh. In this tutorial, you will go through the three main steps when solving a problem, which are defining a simulation using General mode in CFX-Pre, obtaining a solution using CFX-Solver Manager and
viewing the results in CFD-Post.
The injection mixing pipe, common in the process industry, is composed of two pipes: one with a larger
diameter than the other. Analyzing and optimizing the mixing process is often critical for many chemical processes. CFD is useful not only in identifying problem areas (where mixing is poor), but also in
testing new designs before they are implemented.
The geometry for this example consists of a circular pipe of diameter 1.0 m with a 90 bend, and a
smaller pipe of diameter 0.3 m which joins with the main pipe at an oblique angle. Water at 315.0 K
enters in the 0.3 m diameter pipe at a rate of 5.0 m/s while water at 285.0 K enters in the 1.0 m diameter
pipe at a rate of 0.5 m/s.
Figure 5.1: Injection Mixing Pipe

In this tutorial, you will establish a general workflow for analyzing the flow of the water fluid into and
out of an injection pipe. First, a simulation will be created and an existing mesh will be imported in
CFX-Pre. A viscosity expression will also be created, and will be used to modify the water properties
later on in this tutorial to increase the solution accuracy. Finally, initial values will be set and a solution

90

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

will be found using CFX-Solver Manager. The results will then be viewed in CFD-Post. Streamlines originating from the main inlet will be generated to show the flow of the water into and out of the injection
pipe.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

5.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
InjectMixerMesh.gtm
InjectMixer_velocity_profile.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial follows this general workflow for setting up the case in CFX-Pre:
5.4.1. Importing a Mesh
5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties
5.4.3. Plotting an Expression
5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression
5.4.5. Modify Material Properties
5.4.6. Creating the Domain
5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary
5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary
5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary
5.4.10. Setting Initial Values
5.4.11. Setting Solver Control
5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run InjectMixer.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 100).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

91

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Ensure General is selected and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type InjectMixer.

6.

Click Save.

7.

Proceed to Importing a Mesh (p. 92).

5.4.1. Importing a Mesh

The following steps will demonstrate how to import a mesh.
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

InjectMixerMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) from the
shortcut menu.

5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties

Viscosity varies with temperature, which implies that the water will behave differently when coming
through the 1.0 m and the 0.3 m diameter pipes. In the following steps, you will create an expression
for viscosity as a function of temperature. This expression will then be used to modify the properties
of the library material: Water to increase the accuracy of the solution. By setting temperature-dependent
material properties, Viscosity will be made to vary linearly with temperature between the following
conditions:

=1.8E-03 N s m-2 at T=275.0 K

=5.45E-04 N s m-2 at T=325.0 K

The variable T (Temperature) is a CFX System Variable recognized by CFX-Pre, denoting static temperature. All variables, expressions, locators, functions, and constants can be viewed by double-clicking
the appropriate entry (such as Additional Variables or Expressions) in the tree view.
All expressions must have consistent units. You should be careful if using temperature in an expression
with units other than [K].
The Expressions tab lets you define, modify, evaluate, plot, copy, delete and browse through expressions
used within CFX-Pre.

92

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression.

2.

In the New Expression dialog box, type Tupper.

3.

Click OK.
The details view for the Tupper equation is displayed.

4.

Under Definition, type 325 [K].

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

The expression is added to the list of existing expressions.

6.

Ensure that no expression is highlighted, then right-click in the Expressions workspace and select Insert
> Expression.

7.

In the New Expression dialog box, type Tlower.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Under Definition, type 275 [K].

10. Click Apply to create the expression.

The expression is added to the list of existing expressions.
11. Create expressions for Visupper, Vislower and VisT using the following values.
Name

Definition

Visupper

5.45E-04 [N s m^-2]

Vislower

1.8E-03 [N s m^-2]

VisT

Vislower+(Visupper-Vislower)*(T-Tlower)/(Tupper-Tlower)

5.4.3. Plotting an Expression

1.

Right-click VisT in the Expressions tree view, and then select Edit.
The Expressions details view for VisT appears.

Tip
Alternatively, double-clicking the expression also opens the Expressions details view.

2.

Click the Plot tab and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot

Number of Points

10

(Selected)

Start of Range

275 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

93

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

End of Range

325 [K]

Click Plot Expression.

A plot showing the variation of the expression VisT with the variable T is displayed.

5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression

1.

Click the Evaluate tab.

2.

In T, type 300 [K].

This is between the start and end range defined in the last module.

3.

Click Evaluate Expression.

A value of around 0.0011[kg m^-1 s^-1] for VisT at the given value of T appears in the Value
field.

5.4.5. Modify Material Properties

As mentioned earlier in this tutorial, the default material properties of Water will be modified using
the Viscosity expression to increase the accuracy of the solution.
1.

Click the Outline tab.

2.

Double-click Water under Materials to display the Basic Settings tab.

3.

Click the Material Properties tab.

4.

Expand Transport Properties.

5.

Select Dynamic Viscosity.

6.

Under Dynamic Viscosity, click in Dynamic Viscosity.

7.

Click Enter Expression

8.

Enter the expression VisT into the data box.

9.

Click OK.

5.4.6. Creating the Domain

The domain will be set to use the thermal energy heat transfer model, and the
model.

(k-epsilon) turbulence

Both Basic Settings and Fluid Models are changed in this module. The Initialization tab is for setting
domain-specific initial conditions, which are not used in this tutorial. Instead, global initialization is used
to set the starting conditions.

94

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Select Insert > Domain from the main menu or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, type InjectMixer.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B1.P3

Fluid and Particle

Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

5.

Click Fluid Models.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

0 [atm]

Value

Heat Transfer
> Option

7.

Thermal Energy

Click OK.

5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary

The side inlet boundary must be defined.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to side inlet.

Note
A boundary named after a region will use that region as its location by default.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

95

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

side inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

5.

315 [K]

Click OK.

5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary

The main inlet boundary for the large pipe must be defined. This inlet is defined using a velocity profile.
Profile data must be initialized before the boundary can be created.
You will create a plot showing the velocity profile data, marked by higher velocities near the center of
the inlet, and lower velocities near the inlet walls.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select InjectMixer_velocity_profile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click OK.
The profile data is read into memory.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile
data file is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each
time the solver is started or restarted.

96

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

7.

Set name Name to main inlet.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

main inlet

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary
Setup
> Profile Name

main inlet

10. Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of U, V, W to be applied at the nodes on the main inlet boundary,
and U, V, W entries to be made in Boundary Details. In order to later reset the velocity values at
the main inlet to match those that were originally read from the boundary condition profile file,
revisit Basic Settings for this boundary and click Generate Values.
11. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Boundary Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Value

Subsonic

Mass And
Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer

Plot Options

> Static Temperature

285 [K]

Boundary Contour

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

97

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Contour
> Profile Variable

12. Click OK.

13. Zoom into the main inlet to view the inlet velocity contour.

5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary

In this module you create the outlet boundary. All other surfaces that have not been explicitly assigned
a boundary will remain in the InjectMixer Default object, which is shown in the tree view. This
boundary uses a No-Slip Adiabatic Wall by default.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to outlet.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

outlet

Boundary Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

5.

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

5.4.10. Setting Initial Values

For this tutorial, the initial values will be set automatically. An automatic guess is sufficient for this
particular problem.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Click Close.

98

and review, but do not change, the current settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

5.4.11. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence
Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence
Control
> Fluid Timescale
Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence
Control
> Fluid Timescale
Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s]

[a]

Convergence
Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence
Criteria
> Residual Target

1.E-4

[b]

a. The physical timescale that will be set up is derived from the pipe diameter (1
m) and the rate at which the water flows in the pipe (0.5 m/s).
b. An RMS value of at least 1.E-5 is usually required for adequate convergence, but
the default value is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

3.

Click OK.

5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

Once the problem has been defined you move from General mode into CFX-Solver.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

99

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

InjectMixer.def

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (InjectMixer.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts
and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

4.

When you are finished, select File > Quit in CFX-Pre.

5.

Click Save & Quit if prompted, to save InjectMixer.cfx

6.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 100).

5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

You will now generate a solution for the CFD simulation that you just prepared.

5.5.1. Starting the Run

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed, with the CFXSolver input file set.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

When the run ends, ensure that the check box next to Post-Process Results is cleared and click OK to
close the dialog box.

5.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

1.

Select Tools > Post-Process Results or click Post-Process Results

2.

If using CFX-Solver Manager in stand-alone mode, optionally select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK.

5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace display by default.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry
5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet
5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges
5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color
5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet
5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy

100

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post

5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry

Throughout this and the following examples, use your mouse and the Viewing Tools toolbar to manipulate the geometry as required at any time.
1.

In the tree view, double-click Wireframe.

2.

Set the Edge Angle to 15 [degree].

3.

Click Apply.

5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet
When you complete this module you will see streamlines (mainly blue and green) starting at the main
inlet of the geometry and proceeding to the outlet. Above where the side pipe meets the main pipe,
there is an area where the flow re-circulates rather than flowing roughly tangent to the direction of the
pipe walls.
1.

Select Insert > Streamline from the main menu or click Streamline

2.

Under Name, type MainStream.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Type

3D Streamline

Definition
> Start From

main inlet

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, then select
Isometric View (Y up).
The pipe is displayed with the main inlet in the bottom right of the viewer.

5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges

You can change the appearance of the streamlines using the Range setting on the Color tab.
1.

Under User Locations and Plots, modify the streamline object MainStream by applying the following
settings
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Range

Local

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

101

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

2.

Click Apply.
The color map is fitted to the range of velocities found along the streamlines. The streamlines
therefore collectively contain every color in the color map.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Range

User Specified

Min

0.2 [m s^-1]

Max

2.2 [m s^-1]

Note
Portions of streamlines that have values outside the range shown in the legend are
colored according to the color at the nearest end of the legend. When using tubes or
symbols (which contain faces), more accurate colors are obtained with lighting turned
off.

4.

Click Apply.
The streamlines are colored using the specified range of velocity values.

5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color

1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Color

(Green)

Color can be set to green by selecting it from the color pallet, or by repeatedly clicking on the
color box until it cycles through to the default green color.
2.

Click Apply.

5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet

The following steps illustrate using this feature to add a streamline object that originates at the side
inlet.
1.

Right-click MainStream and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Name window, type SideStream.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Double-click the newly created streamline, SideStream.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

102

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Color

6.

Value

> Start From

side inlet

Mode

Constant

Color

(Red)

Click Apply.
Red streamlines appear, starting from the side inlet.

7.

For better view, select Isometric View (Y up).

5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy

Away from walls, turbulence kinetic energy has an influence on the level of mixing. A plane will be
created to view the Turbulence Kinetic Energy variable within the domain.

Note
This module has multiple changes compiled into single steps in preparation for other tutorials
that provide fewer specific instructions.
1.

Turn off the visibility of both the MainStream and the SideStream objects.

2.

Create a plane named Plane 1 that is normal to X and passing through the X = 0 Point. To do so, specific instructions follow.

3.

a.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane and click OK.

b.

In the details view, set Definition > Method to YZ Plane and X to 0 [m].

c.

Click Apply.

Color the plane using the variable Turbulence Kinetic Energy, to show regions of high turbulence.
To do so, apply the settings below.
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Turbulence Kinetic
Energy

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Experiment with other variables to color this plane (for example, Temperature to show the temperature
mixing of the two streams).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

103

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Commonly used variables are in the drop-down menu. A full list of available variables can be viewed
by clicking

next to the Variable data box.

5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post

1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

If prompted by a dialog box, save the state at your discretion.

104

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 6: Flow from a Circular Vent

This tutorial includes:
6.1.Tutorial Features
6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
6.3. Preparing the Working Directory
6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a transient problem in CFX-Pre.
Using an opening type boundary in CFX-Pre.
Making use of multiple configurations in CFX-Pre
Modeling smoke using additional variables in CFX-Pre.
Visualizing a smoke plume using an Isosurface in CFD-Post.
Creating an image for printing, and generating a movie in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State
Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Opening
Wall: No-Slip

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Transient Example

Configuration

Multiple

Transient Results File

CFD-Post

Plots

Animation
Isosurface

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

105

Flow from a Circular Vent

Component

Feature

Details

Other

Auto Annotation
Movie Generation
Printing
Time Step Selection
Title/Text
Transient Animation

6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this example, a chimney stack releases smoke that is dispersed into the atmosphere with an oncoming
side wind of 1 m/s. The turbulence will be set to intensity and length scale with a value of 0.05, which
corresponds to 5% turbulence, a medium level intensity, and with an eddy length scale value of 0.25
m. The goal of this tutorial is to model the dispersion of the smoke from the chimney stack over time.
Unlike previous tutorials, which were steady-state, this example is time-dependent. Initially, no smoke
is being released. Subsequently, the chimney starts to release smoke. As a postprocessing exercise, you
produce an animation that illustrates how the plume of smoke develops with time.

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

106

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

CircVentMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre for a simulation with
two analyses. First is a steady-state analysis with no smoke being produced by the chimney. The second
analysis takes the setup for the steady-state and adapts it for a transient analysis. The results from the
steady-state analysis will be used as the initial guess for the transient analysis.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CircVent.pre
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 121).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Set File name to CircVent.

6.

Click Save.

6.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CircVentMesh.gtm

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

107

Flow from a Circular Vent

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

6.4.2. Creating an Additional Variable

In this tutorial an Additional Variable (non-reacting scalar component) will be used to model the dispersion of smoke from the vent.

Note
While smoke is not required for the steady-state simulation, including it here prevents you
from having to set up time value interpolation in the transient analysis.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Additional Variable.

2.

Set Name to smoke.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Variable Type to Volumetric.

5.

Set Units to [kg m^-3].

6.

Click OK.

6.4.3. Defining the Steady-State Analysis

The existing analysis will be set up as steady-state.

6.4.3.1. Renaming the Analysis

To rename the existing analysis:
1.

From the Outline Tree, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 and click Rename.

2.

Rename the analysis to Steady State Analysis.

6.4.3.2. Creating the Domain

You will create a fluid domain that includes support for smoke as an Additional Variable.
1.

Select Insert > Domain from the menu bar, or click Domain
click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

108

, then set the name to CircVent and

Value

B1.P3

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid Models

0 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable

smoke

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke
> Kinematic Diffusivity

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke
> Kinematic Diffusivity
> Kinematic Diffusivity

1.0E-5 [m^2 s^-1]

[a]

a. 1.0E-5 [m^2 s^-1] is a representative kinematic diffusivity value for smoke in air.

3.

Click OK.

6.4.3.3. Creating the Boundaries

This is an example of external flow, since fluid is flowing over an object and not through an enclosure
such as a pipe network (which would be an example of internal flow). In external flow problems, some
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

109

Flow from a Circular Vent

inlets will be made sufficiently large that they do not affect the CFD solution. However, the length scale
values produced by the Default Intensity and AutoCompute Length Scale option for turbulence are
based on inlet size. They are appropriate for internal flow problems and particularly, cylindrical pipes.
In general, you need to set the turbulence intensity and length scale explicitly for large inlets in external
flow problems. If you do not have a value for the length scale, you can use a length scale based on a
typical length of the object over which the fluid is flowing. In this case, you will choose a turbulence
length scale that is one-tenth of the diameter of the vent.
For parts of the boundary where the flow direction changes, or is unknown, an opening boundary can
be used. An opening boundary allows flow to both enter and leave the fluid domain during the course
of the analysis.

6.4.3.3.1. Inlet Boundary

You will create the inlet boundary with velocity components set consistently with the problem description.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Wind.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Wind

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Mass and Momentum

>U

1 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

[a]

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

110

0.25 [m]

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

0 [kg m^-3]

[b]

a. From the problem description.

b. The smoke value that will be set up corresponds to no smoke at the inlet.

5.

Click OK.

Note
The boundary marker vectors used to display boundary conditions (inlets, outlets, openings)
are normal to the boundary surface regardless of the actual direction specification. To plot
vectors in the direction of flow, select Boundary Vector under the Plot Options tab for the
inlet boundary, and on the Labels and Markers Options tab (accessible from Case Options
> Labels and Markers on the Outline tree view), ensure that Settings > Show Boundary
Markers is selected and Show Inlet Markers is cleared.

6.4.3.3.2. Opening Boundary

You will create an opening boundary with pressure and flow direction specified. If fluid enters the domain
through the opening, it should have turbulence intensity and length scale, as well as smoke concentration,
set to the same values as for the inlet.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Atmosphere.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

Atmosphere

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass and Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

111

Flow from a Circular Vent

Tab

Setting

Value

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Flow Direction
> Option

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.25 [m]

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

5.

0 [kg m^-3]

Click OK.

6.4.3.3.3. Inlet for the Vent

You will create the vent inlet boundary with a normal velocity of 0.01 m/s as prescribed in the problem
description and no smoke release. The turbulence level for the inlet vent will be determined from turbulence intensity and eddy viscosity ratio.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Vent.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Vent

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Normal Speed

112

0.01 [m s^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and Eddy

Viscosity Ratio

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence
> Eddy Viscosity Ratio

10

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

5.

0 [kg m^-3]

Click OK.

6.4.3.4. Setting Initial Values

For this tutorial, the automatic initial values are suitable. Review and apply the default settings:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Review the settings for velocity, pressure, turbulence and the smoke.

3.

Click OK.

6.4.3.5. Setting Solver Control

CFX-Solver has the ability to calculate physical time step size for steady-state problems. If you do not
know the time step size to set for your problem, you can use the Auto Timescale option.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

75

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

113

Flow from a Circular Vent

3.

Note that Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control is set to Auto
Timescale.

4.

Click OK.

6.4.4. Defining the Transient Analysis

In this part of the tutorial, you will duplicate the steady-state analysis and adapt it to set up a transient
flow analysis in CFX-Pre.

6.4.4.1. Creating the Analysis

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Steady State Analysis and select Duplicate.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Copy of Steady State Analysis and select Rename.

3.

Rename the analysis to Transient Analysis.

6.4.4.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

In this step you will set the new analysis to a type of transient. Later, you will set the concentration of
smoke for the transient analysis to rise asymptotically to its final concentration with time, so it is necessary
to ensure that the interval between the time steps is smaller at the beginning of the simulation than
at the end.
1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Analysis Type and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

30 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

4*0.25, 2*0.5, 2*1.0,

13*2.0 [s]

[a]

Analysis Type

114

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Initial Time

> Option

Automatic with Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

0 [s]

a. This list specifies 4 time steps of 0.25 [s], then 2 time steps of 0.5 [s], and so on.
Enter the list without the units, then set the units in the drop-down list. Do NOT
click Enter Expression

4.

to enter lists of values.

Click OK.

6.4.4.3. Modifying the Boundary Conditions

The only boundary condition that needs altering for the transient analysis is the Vent boundary condition. In the steady-state calculation, this boundary had a small amount of air flowing through it. In the
transient calculation, more air passes through the vent and there is a time-dependent concentration of
smoke in the air. This is initially zero, but builds up to a larger value. The smoke concentration will be
specified using the CFX Expression Language.

6.4.4.3.1. To Modify the Vent Inlet Boundary Condition

1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis > CircVent is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > CircVent > Vent and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Value

> Normal Speed

0.2 [m s^-1]

Leave the Vent details view open for now.

You are going to create an expression for smoke concentration. The concentration is zero for time
t=0 and builds up to a maximum of 1 kg m^-3.
4.

Create a new expression by selecting Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression from
the menu bar. Set the name to TimeConstant.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Name

Definition

TimeConstant

3 [s]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

115

Flow from a Circular Vent

6.

Click Apply to create the expression.

7.

Create the following expressions with specific settings, remembering to click Apply after each is defined:
Name

Definition

FinalConcentration

1 [kg m^-3]

ExpFunction

FinalConcentration*abs(1-exp(-t/TimeConstant))
[a]

a. When entering this function, you can select most of the required items by
right-clicking in the Definition window in the Expression details view instead
of typing them. The names of the existing expressions are under the Expressions
menu. The exp and abs functions are under Functions > CEL. The variable t is
under Variables.

Note
The abs function takes the modulus (or magnitude) of its argument. Even though the
expression (1- exp (-t/TimeConstant)) can never be less than zero, the abs function is
included to ensure that the numerical error in evaluating it near to zero will never make
the expression evaluate to a negative number.

Next, you will visualize how the concentration of smoke issued from the vent varies with time.

6.4.4.3.2. Plotting Smoke Concentration

1.

Double-click ExpFunction in the Expressions tree view.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot

(Selected)

t
> Start of Range

0 [s]

t
> End of Range

3.

30 [s]

Click Plot Expression.

The button name then changes to Define Plot, as shown.

116

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

As can be seen, the smoke concentration rises to its asymptotic value reaching 90% of its final
value at around 7 seconds.
4.

Click the Boundary: Vent tab.

In the next step, you will apply the expression ExpFunction to the additional variable smoke
as it applies to the Transient Analysis boundary Vent.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary
Details

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

ExpFunction
[a]

a. Click Enter Expression

6.

to enter text.

Click OK.

6.4.4.4. Initialization Values

When the Transient Analysis is run, the initial values to the CFX-Solver will be taken from the
results of the Steady State Analysis. The steady state and transient analyses will be sequenced
by setting up the configurations of these analyses in a subsequent step. For the moment, you can leave
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

117

Flow from a Circular Vent

all of the initialization data set for the Transient Analysis to Automatic and the initial values
will be read automatically from the Steady State Analysis results. Therefore, there is no need
to revisit the initialization settings.

6.4.4.5. Modifying the Solver Control

1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver > Solver Control and select Edit.

3.

Set Convergence Control > Max. Coeff. Loops to 3.

4.

Leave the other settings at their default values.

5.

Click OK to set the solver control parameters.

6.4.4.6. Setting Output Control

To enable results to be viewed at different time steps, it is necessary to create transient results files at
specified times. The transient results files do not have to contain all solution data. In this step, you will
create minimal transient results files.
1.

In the Outline tree view, double-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver > Output
Control.

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, smoke

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

Time List

Output Frequency
> Time List

1, 2, 3 [s]

[b]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to select items if they do not appear in the drop-down
list. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple items.
b. Do not click Enter Expression
to enter lists of values. Enter the list without
the units, then set the units in the drop-down list.

5.

118

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

set Name to Transient Results 2, and

This creates a second transient results object. Each object can result in the production of many
transient results files.
7.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 2:

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, smoke

Output Frequency
> Option

Time Interval

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

4 [s]

[a]

a. A transient results file will be produced every 4 s (including 0 s) and at 1 s, 2 s

and 3 s. The files will contain no mesh, and data for only the three selected
variables. This reduces the size of the minimal results files. A full results file is
always written at the end of the run.

8.

Click OK.

6.4.5. Configuring Simulation Control

With two types of analysis for this simulation, configuration control is used to sequence these analyses.

6.4.5.1. Configuration Control for the Steady State Analysis

To set up the Steady State Analysis so that it will start at the beginning of the simulation:
1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation Control is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation Control > Configurations and select Insert > Configuration.

3.

Set Name to Steady State.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General
Settings

Flow Analysis

Steady State
Analysis

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

119

Flow from a Circular Vent

Tab

6.

Setting

Value

> Option

Start of Simulation

Click OK.

6.4.5.2. Configuration Control for the Transient Analysis

To set up the Transient Analysis so that it will start upon the completion of the Steady State
Analysis:
1.

Right-click Simulation Control > Configurations and select Insert > Configuration.

2.

Set Name to Transient.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General
Settings

Flow Analysis

Transient Analysis

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1
> Option

End of
Configuration

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1
> Configuration Name

Steady State

Run
Definition

Configuration Execution
Control

Selected

Initial
Values

Initial Values Specification

Selected

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Option

Configuration
Results

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Configuration Name

120

Steady State

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

5.

Click OK.

6.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.mdef) File

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation Control and select Write Solver Input File.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File of type

CFX-Solver Input Files (*.mdef )

File name

CircVent.mdef

Click Save.
This will create CircVent.mdef as well as a directory named CircVent that contains
SteadyState.cfg and Transient.cfg.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the case (.cfx) file.

6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

You can obtain a solution to the steady-state and transient configurations by using the following procedure.
1.

Start CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

From the menu bar, select File > Define Run.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Solver Input File

CircVent.mdef

Edit Configuration

Global Settings

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver Manager will start with the solution of the steady-state configuration.

5.

In the Workspace drop-down menu, select SteadyState_001. The residual plots for six equations will
appear: U - Mom, V - Mom, W - Mom, P - Mass, K-TurbKE, and E-Diss.K (the three momentum conservation
equations, the mass conservation equation and equations for the turbulence kinetic energy and turbulence
eddy dissipation). The Momentum and Mass tab contains four of the plots and the other two are under
Turbulence Quantities. The residual for the smoke equation is also plotted but registers no values since
it is not initialized.

6.

Upon the successful completion of the steady-state configuration, the solution of the transient configuration starts automatically. Notice that the text output generated by the CFX-Solver in the Run Transient
001 Workspace will be more than you have seen for steady-state problems. This is because each time
step consists of several inner (coefficient) iterations. At the end of each time step, information about
various quantities is printed to the text output area. The residual for the smoke equation is now plotted
under the Additional Variables tab.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

121

Flow from a Circular Vent

7.

Upon the successful completion of the combined steady-state and transient configurations, ensure that
the check box beside Post-Process Results is cleared and click OK to close the message indicating the
successful completion of the simulation.

8.

In the CFX-Solver Manager, set Workspace to Run CircVent 001.

9.

From the menu bar, select Tools > Post-Process Results.

10. On the Start CFD-Post dialog box, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager and click OK.

6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this part of the tutorial, you will:
Create an isosurface to illustrate the pattern of smoke concentration.
View results at different time steps.
Animate the results to view the dispersion of smoke from the vent over time.
Save the animation as an MPEG file.
Use volume rendering to show the visibility of smoke with its transparency.

6.6.1. Displaying Smoke Density Using an Isosurface

An isosurface is a surface of constant value of a variable. For instance, it could be a surface consisting
of all points where the velocity is 1 [m s^-1]. In this case, you are going to create an isosurface of smoke
concentration (smoke is the Additional Variable that you specified earlier).
1.

In CFD-Post, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z
up).
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Isosurface, or under Location on the toolbar, click
Isosurface.

3.

Click OK to accept the default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Variable

smoke

Value

0.005 [kg m^-3]

Click Apply.
A bumpy surface is displayed, showing the smoke emanating from the vent.
The surface is rough because the mesh is coarse. For a smoother surface, you would re-run the problem
with a smaller mesh length scale.

122

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The surface will be a constant color because the default settings on the Color tab were used.
When Color Mode is set to either Constant or Use Plot Variable for an isosurface, the isosurface
is displayed in one color.
6.

In Geometry, experiment by changing the Value setting so that you can see the shape of the plume
more clearly.
Zoom in and rotate the geometry, as required.

7.

When you have finished, set Value to 0.002 [kg m^-3].

8.

Right-click a blank spot in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

6.6.2. Viewing the Results at Different Time Steps

When CFD-Post is loaded, the results that are immediately available are those at the final time step; in
this case, at t = 30 s (this is nominally designated Final State). The Timestep Selector shows the Configuration, the step of the Simulation, the Step (outer loop) number, the Time (simulated time in
seconds) of the configuration and the Type of results file that was saved at that time step for the configuration. You can see that Partial results files were saved (as requested in CFX-Pre) for all time steps
in the transient configuration except for the last one.
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Load the results for a Time value of 2 s by double-clicking the appropriate row in the Timestep Selector.
After a short pause, the Loaded Timestep (located just below the title bar of the Timestep Selector)
will be updated with the new time step number.

3.

Load the time value of 4 s using the Timestep Selector.

The smoke has now spread out even more, and is being carried by the wind.

4.

Double-click some more time values to see how the smoke plume grows with time.

5.

Finish by loading a time value of 12 s.

6.6.3. Generating Titled Image Files

You can produce titled image output from CFD-Post.

6.6.3.1. Adding a Title

First, you will add text to the viewer so that the printed output has a title.
1.

Select Insert > Text from the menu bar or click Create text

2.

Click OK to accept default name.

3.

In the Text String box, enter the following text.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

123

Flow from a Circular Vent

Isosurface showing smoke concentration of 0.002 kg/m^3 after

Note
Further text will be added at a later stage to complete this title.

4.

Select Embed Auto Annotation.

5.

Set Type to Time Value.

In the text line, note that <aa> has been added to the end. This is where the time value will be
placed.

6.

Click Apply to create the title.

7.

Click the Location tab to modify the position of the title.

The default settings for text objects center text at the top of the screen. To experiment with the
position of the text, change the settings on the Location tab.

8.

Under the Appearance tab, change Color Mode to User Specified and select a new color.

9.

Click Apply.

6.6.3.2. JPEG output

CFD-Post can save images in several different formats. In this section you will save an image in JPEG
format.
1.

Select File > Save Picture, or click Save Picture

2.

Set Format to JPEG.

3.

Click Browse

4.

Browse to the directory where you want the file saved.

5.

Enter a name for the JPEG file.

6.

Click Save to set the file name and directory.

next to the File data box.

This sets the path and name for the file.

7.

To save the file, click Save on the Save Picture dialog box.
To view the file or make a hard copy, use an application that supports JPEG files.

8.

124

Turn off the visibility of the text object to hide it.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.6.4. Generating a Movie

You can generate an MPEG file to show the transient flow of the plume of smoke. To generate a movie
file, you use the Animation dialog box.
1.

In the Timestep Selector, ensure that a time value of 0 s is loaded.

2.

Click Animation

3.

Ensure that Quick Animation is selected.

4.

Position the geometry so that you will be able to see the plume of smoke.

5.

In the object tree of the Animation dialog box, click Timesteps.

6.

Click More Animation Options

7.

Ensure that the Repeat forever button

8.

Select Save Movie.

9.

Set Format to MPEG1.

10. Click Browse

to show more animation settings.

next to Repeat is not selected (not depressed).

next to Save Movie.

11. Set File name to CircVent.mpg.

12. If required, set the path location to a different directory.
13. Click Save.
The movie file name (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
14. Click Play the animation

The movie will be created as the animation proceeds.

This will be slow, because for each time step results will be loaded and objects will be created.
To view the movie file, you need to use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.

Note
To explore additional animation options, click the Options button. On the Advanced
tab of Animation Options, there is a check box called Save Frames As Image Files.
By selecting this check box, the JPEG or PPM files used to encode each frame of the
movie will persist after movie creation; otherwise, they will be deleted.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

125

Flow from a Circular Vent

6.6.5. Viewing the Dispersion of Smoke at the Final Time Step

The final time step has the greatest dispersion of smoke, so you will load only that time step, then view
the smoke using the Volume Rendering feature.
1.

Select File > Load Results.

2.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Load only the last results (the other default settings should
remain unchanged) and ensure that File name is set to CircVent_001.mres. Click Open.

Note
A warning message appears. Click OK.

3.

If necessary, right-click a blank spot in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z
up).

4.

In the Outline view, clear Isosurface 1 and Text 1.

5.

Select Insert > Volume Rendering and set the Name to be SmokeVolume.

6.

In the details view, set the following values:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Variable

smoke

Resolution

50

Transparency

.2

Mode

Variable

Variable

smoke

Color Map

Greyscale

Color

Click Apply.
7.

126

When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 7: Flow Around a Blunt Body

This tutorial includes:
7.1.Tutorial Features
7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
7.3. Preparing the Working Directory
7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

7.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Solving and postprocessing a case where the geometry has been omitted on one side of a symmetry plane.
Using free-slip wall boundaries as a compromise between accurate flow modeling and computational grid
size.
Accurately modeling the near-wall flow using Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model.
Running the CFX-Solver in parallel (optional).
Creating vector plots in CFD-Post with uniform spacing between the vectors.
Creating a macro using power syntax in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Constant Property Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Free-Slip

Timestep
CFX-Solver
Manager

Parallel Processing

CFD-Post

Plots

Physical Time Scale

Default Locators

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

127

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Component

Feature

Details
Outline Plot
(Wireframe)
Sampling Plane
Streamline
Vector
Volume

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Instancing
Transformation
Lighting Adjustment
Symmetry
Viewing the Mesh

7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, a generic vehicle body is placed into an oncoming side wind of 15 m/s. The turbulence
will be set to Intensity and Length scale with a value of 0.05, which corresponds to 5% turbulence, a
medium level intensity, and with an Eddy Length scale value of 0.1 m.
The goal of this tutorial is to set up, simulate, and then visualize the flow around the body. Since both
the geometry and the flow are symmetric about a vertical plane, you will only use half of the geometry
to find the solution. You will use free-slip wall boundaries on some sides of the domain to model external flow. The flow near the body is modeled using Shear Stress Transport. Since compressibility effects
are not expected to be significant, you can model this as incompressible flow.
Figure 7.1: External Air Flow Over a Generic Vehicle Body

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

128

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

7.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
BluntBodyDist.cse
BluntBodyMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run BluntBody.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 135).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type BluntBody.

6.

Click Save.

7.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

BluntBodyMesh.gtm

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

129

Flow Around a Blunt Body

7.4.2. Creating the Domain

The flow of air in the domain is expected to be turbulent. The Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model with automatic wall function treatment will be used because of its highly accurate predictions
of flow separation. To take advantage of the SST model, the boundary layer should be resolved with
at least 10 mesh nodes. In order to reduce computational time, the mesh in this tutorial is much
coarser than that.
As stated in the overview, this tutorial models incompressible flow. Incompressible flow is specified by
choosing an incompressible fluid. You will use Air at 25 C as the incompressible fluid.
As part of the domain settings, you will specify a reference pressure. CFX requires this when modeling
incompressible flow.
1.

Click Domain

, and set the name to BluntBody.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of BluntBody:

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B1.P3

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence
> Option

a. Click the Ellipsis

drop-down menu.

3.

130

Shear Stress
Transport

icon if the required material does not appear in the

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

7.4.3. Creating Composite Regions

An imported mesh may contain many 2D regions. For the purpose of creating boundary conditions, it
can sometimes be useful to group several 2D regions together and apply a single boundary to the
composite 2D region. In this case, you are going to create a Union between two regions that both require
a free-slip wall boundary.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Regions > Composite Region.

2.

Set the name to FreeWalls and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

2D

4.

Click
beside the Region List dialog box, to display the Selection Dialog. Hold down the Ctrl key and
select Free1 and Free2.

5.

Click OK to confirm your selection.

6.

Click OK to create the composite region.

7.4.4. Creating the Boundaries

The simulation requires inlet, outlet, wall (no slip and free-slip) and symmetry plane boundaries. The
regions for these boundaries were defined when the mesh was created (except for the composite region
just created for the free-slip wall boundary).

7.4.4.1. Inlet Boundary

1.

Click Boundary

2.

Under Name, type Inlet.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Inlet

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

131

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal Speed

15 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

[a]

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.1 [m]

[a]

a. From the problem description.

4.

Click OK.

7.4.4.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Outlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

7.4.4.3. Free-Slip Wall Boundary

The top and side surfaces of the rectangular region will use free-slip wall boundaries.
On free-slip walls the shear stress is set to zero so that the fluid is not retarded.
The velocity normal to the wall is also set to zero.
The velocity parallel to the wall is calculated during the solution.
This boundary is an approximation that may not accurately represent the true flow conditions. By using
a free-slip wall boundary, the flow modeling will be less accurate but the computational grid size can
be reduced by modeling less of the surroundings. If this case were modeling a wind tunnel experiment,
the geometry would match the size and shape of the wind tunnel and use no-slip walls. If this case

132

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

were modeling a blunt body open to the atmosphere, a much larger domain would be used to minimize
the effect of the far-field boundary, and the far-field boundary type would be set to either a free-slip
wall or a pressure-specified entrainment opening.
You will apply a single boundary to both walls by using the composite region defined earlier.
1.

Create a new boundary named FreeWalls.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

FreeWalls

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

3.

Free Slip Wall

Click OK.

7.4.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named SymP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP

Click OK.

7.4.4.5. Wall Boundary on the Blunt Body Surface

1.

Create a new boundary named Body.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Body

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

The remaining 2D regions (in this case, just the low Z face) will be assigned the default boundary which
is an adiabatic, no-slip wall condition. In this case, the name of the default boundary is BluntBody
Default. Although the boundaries Body and BluntBody Default are identical (except for their locations),
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

133

Flow Around a Blunt Body

the Body boundary was created so that, during postprocessing, its location can be conveniently distinguished from the other adiabatic, no-slip wall surfaces.

7.4.5. Setting Initial Values

The initial conditions are consistent with inlet boundaries.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

15 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

3.

0 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

7.4.6. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

60

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control

134

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Tab

Setting

Value

> Timescale Control

Physical
Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s][a]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1e-05

a. Based on the air speed and the size of the object.

3.

Click OK.

7.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

BluntBody.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

This tutorial introduces the parallel solver capabilities of CFX.

Note
The results produced will be identical, whether produced by a parallel or serial run.
If you do not want to solve this tutorial in parallel (on more than one processor) or you do not have a
license to run the CFX-Solver in parallel, proceed to Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 136).
If you do not know if you have a license to run the CFX-Solver in parallel, you should either ask your
system administrator, or query the license server (see the ANSYS, Inc. Licensing Guide (which is installed
with the ANSYS License Manager) for details). Alternatively proceed to Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 136).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

135

Flow Around a Blunt Body

If you would like to solve this tutorial in parallel on the same machine, proceed to Obtaining a Solution
with Local Parallel (p. 136).
If you would like to solve this tutorial in parallel across different machines, proceed to Obtaining a
Solution with Distributed Parallel (p. 137).

7.5.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial

When CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the CFD problem by using the following procedure.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK. Continue this tutorial from Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 140).

7.5.2. Obtaining a Solution in Parallel

7.5.2.1. Background to Parallel Running in CFX
Using the parallel capability of the CFX-Solver enables you to divide a large CFD problem so that it can
run on more than one processor/machine at once. This saves time and, when multiple machines are
used, avoids problems that arise when a CFD calculation requires more memory than a single machine
has available. The partition (division) of the CFD problem is automatic.
A number of events occur when you set up a parallel run and then ask the CFX-Solver to calculate the
solution:
Your mesh will be divided into the number of partitions that you have chosen.
The CFX-Solver runs separately on each of the partitions on the selected machine(s).
The results that one CFX-Solver process calculates affects the other CFX-Solver processes at the interface
between the different sections of the mesh.
All of the CFX-Solver processes are required to communicate with each other and this is handled by the
master process.
The master process always runs on the machine that you are logged into when the parallel run starts. The
other CFX-Solver processes are slave processes and may be run on other machines.
After the problem has been solved, a single results file is written. It will be identical to a results file from the
same problem run as a serial process, with one exception: an extra variable Real partition number
will be available for the parallel run. This variable will be used later in this tutorial during post processing.

7.5.2.2. Obtaining a Solution with Local Parallel

In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box should already be open.
To run in local parallel mode:
1.
136

Leave Type of Run set to Full.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

If Type of Run was instead set to Partitioner Only, your mesh would be split into a number
of partitions but would not be run in the CFX-Solver afterwards.
2.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your configuration; for example, Platform MPI Local
Parallel.
This is the recommended method for most applications.

3.

If required, click Add Partition

to add more partitions.

By default,partitions are assigned. Ideally, the number of partitions should not exceed the number
of available processor cores.
4.

Select Show Advanced Controls.

5.

Click the Partitioner tab at the top of the dialog box.

6.

Use the default MeTiS partitioner.

Your model will be divided into a number of sections, with each section running in its own CFXSolver process. The default is the MeTiS partitioner because it produces more efficient partitions
than either Recursive Coordinate Bisection or User Specified Direction.

7.

Click Start Run.

8.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

9.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

10. Click OK.

Continue this tutorial from Text Output when Running in Parallel (p. 139).

7.5.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel

Before running in Distributed Parallel mode, ensure that your system has been configured as described
in the installation documentation.
In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box should already be open.
1.

Leave Type of Run set to Full.

If Type of Run was instead set to Partitioner Only, your mesh would be split into a number
of partitions but would not be run in the CFX-Solver afterwards.

2.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Dis
tributed Parallel.
The name of the machine that you are currently logged into should be in the Host Name list. You
are going to run with two partitions on two different machines, so another machine must be added.

3.

Click Insert Host

to specify a new host machine.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

137

Flow Around a Blunt Body

The Select Parallel Hosts dialog box is displayed. This is where you choose additional machines to run
your processes.
Your system administrator should have set up a hosts file containing a list of the machines that are
available to run the parallel CFX-Solver.
The Host Name column displays names of available hosts.
The second column shows the number of processors on that machine.
The third shows the relative processor speed: a processor on a machine with a relative speed of 1 would
typically be twice as fast as a machine with a relative speed of 0.5.
The last column displays operating system information.
This information is read from the hosts file; if any information is missing or incorrect your system administrator should correct the hosts file.

Note
The # processors, relative speed and system information does not have to be specified
to be able to run on a host.

4.

Select the name of another machine in the Host Name list.

Select a machine that you can log into.

5.

Click Add.
The name of the machine is added to the Host Name column.

Note
Ensure that the machine that you are currently logged into is in the Hosts Name list in
the Define Run dialog box.

6.

Close the Select Parallel Hosts dialog box.

7.

Select Show Advanced Controls.

8.

Click the Partitioner tab at the top of the dialog box.

9.

Use the default MeTiS partitioner.

Your model will be divided into two sections, with each section running in its own CFX-Solver
process. The default is the MeTiS partitioner because it produces more efficient partitions than
either Recursive Coordinate Bisection or User Specified Direction.

10. Click Start Run to begin the parallel run.

11. Click OK on the dialog box.

138

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

12. When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.
13. If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.
14. Click OK.

7.5.2.4. Text Output when Running in Parallel

The text output area shows what is being written to the output file. You will see information similar to
the following:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at Start of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Run mode:

partitioning run

+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| Host
| Mesh | PID
|
Job Started
|
|
| Part |
| DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| fastmachine1
|
1 |
5952 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:09 |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+

This tells you that the information following is concerned with the partitioning. After the partitioning
job has finished, you will find:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Partitioning Information
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Partitioning information for domain: BluntBody
+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
|
Elements
|
Vertices
|
Faces
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Part |
Number
%
|
Number
%
%Ovlp | Number
%
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Full |
131878
|
37048
|
11318
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
|
1 |
67873
50.4 |
19431
50.4
4.0 |
5705
49.5 |
|
2 |
66865
49.6 |
19151
49.6
4.0 |
5820
50.5 |
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Sum |
134738 100.0 |
38582 100.0
4.0 |
11525 100.0 |
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Partitioning CPU-Time Requirements
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
-

Preparations
Low-level mesh partitioning
Global partitioning information
Element and face partitioning information
Vertex partitioning information
Partitioning information compression
Summed CPU-time for mesh partitioning

3.689E-01
5.599E-02
9.998E-03
7.999E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
4.609E-01

seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds

+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at End of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+
| Host
| Mesh |
Job Finished
|
CPU
|
|
| Part | DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss | seconds |
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

139

Flow Around a Blunt Body

| fastmachine1
|
1 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:09 | 8.020E-01 |
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+
Total wall clock time: 7.990E-01 seconds
or: (
0:
0:
(
Days:
Hours:

0:
Minutes:

0.799 )
Seconds )

This marks the end of the partitioning job. The CFX-Solver now begins to solve your parallel run:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at Start of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Run mode:

parallel run (Platform MPI)

+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| Host
| Mesh | PID
|
Job Started
|
|
| Part |
| DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| fastmchine1
|
1 |
6044 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:11 |
|
|
2 |
3276 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:11 |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+

The machine that you are logged into runs the master process, and controls the overall simulation. The
second machine selected will run the slave process. If you had more than two processes, each additional
process is run as a slave process.
The master process in this example is running on the mesh partition number 1 and the slave is running
on partition number 2. You can find out which nodes and elements are in each partition by using CFDPost later on in the tutorial.
When the CFX-Solver finishes, the output file displays the job information and a dialog box to indicate
completion of the run.

7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In CFD-Post, you will:
Create an instance transform object to recreate the full geometry
Create a vector plot that shows how the flow behaves around the body
Create a pressure plot that shows the pressure distribution on the body
Make a surface streamline that shows the path of air along the surface of the body
Examine the values of the dimensionless wall distance
the walls

to make sure that the mesh is sufficiently fine near

7.6.1. Using Symmetry Plane to Display the Full Geometry

Earlier in this tutorial you used a symmetry plane boundary because the entire blunt body is symmetrical about a plane. Due to this symmetry, it was necessary to use only half of the full geometry to calculate the CFD results. However, for visualization purposes, it is helpful to use the full blunt body. CFDPost is able to recreate the full data set from the half that was originally calculated. This is done by
creating an Instance Transform object.

140

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

7.6.1.1. Manipulating the Geometry

You need to manipulate the geometry so that you will be able to see what happens when you use the
symmetry plane. The CFD-Post features that you have used in earlier tutorials will not be described in
detail. New features will be described in detail.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +X.

7.6.1.2. Creating an Instance Transform

Instance Transforms are used to visualize a full geometry representation in cases where the simulation
took advantage of symmetry to solve for only part of the geometry. There are three types of transforms
that you can use: Rotation, Translation, Reflection/Mirroring. In this tutorial, you will create a Reflection
transform located on a plane.
1.

Click Location > Plane and set the name to Reflection Plane.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

ZX Plane

Definition

Render

3.

>Y

0.0 [m]

Show Faces

(cleared)

Click Apply.
This creates a plane at y=0, the same location as the symmetry plane defined in CFX-Pre. Now the
instance transform can be created using this plane:

4.

From the main menu, select Insert > Instance Transform and accept the default name.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Instancing Info From Domain

(Cleared)

Apply Rotation

(Cleared)

Apply Reflection

(Selected)

Apply Reflection
> Plane

6.

Reflection Plane

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

141

Flow Around a Blunt Body

7.6.1.3. Using the Reflection Transform

You can apply the new transform to graphics objects. For example, you can modify the display of the
wireframe as follows:
1.

Under the Outline tab, in User Locations and Plots, configure the following setting(s) of
Wireframe:
Tab

Setting

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Zoom so that the geometry fills the Viewer.

Value

Instance Transform
1

You will see the full blunt body.

In this case, you created a new instance transform and applied it to the wireframe. This caused only
the wireframe object to be mirrored. If you had modified the default transform instead of creating a
new one, then all graphics (including those not yet made) would be mirrored by default.

7.6.2. Creating Velocity Vectors

You are now going to create a vector plot to show velocity vectors behind the blunt body. You need
to first create an object to act as a locator, which, in this case, will be a sampling plane. Then, create
the vector plot itself.

7.6.2.1. Creating the Sampling Plane

A sampling plane is a plane with evenly spaced sampling points on it.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.
This ensures that the changes can be seen.

2.

Create a new plane named Sample.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) to create a sampling plane that is parallel to the ZX plane and located
at x= 6 m, y= 0.001 m and z= 1 m relative to blunt object:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Point and Normal

Definition
> Point

6, -0.001, 1

Definition

142

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal

0, 1, 0

Plane Bounds
> Type

Rectangular

Plane Bounds
> X Size

2.5 [m]

Plane Bounds
> Y Size

2.5 [m]

Plane Type

Sample

Plane Type
> X Samples

20

Plane Type

Render

4.

> Y Samples

20

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Click Apply.
You can zoom in on the sampling plane to see the location of the sampling points (where lines
intersect). There are a total of 400 (20 * 20) sampling points on the plane. A vector can be created
at each sampling point.

5.

Turn off the visibility of Sample.

7.6.2.2. Creating a Vector Plot Using Different Sampling Methods

1.

Click Vector

and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Sample

Definition

Symbol

> Sampling

Vertex

Symbol Size

0.25

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Zoom until the vector plot is roughly the same size as the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

143

Flow Around a Blunt Body

You should be able to see a region of recirculation behind the blunt body.
5.

Ignore the vertices on the sampling plane and increase the density of the vectors by applying the following
settings:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Sampling

Value

Equally Spaced

Definition
> # of Points

1000

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Change the location of the Vector plot by applying the following setting:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

8.

Value

SymP

Click Apply.

7.6.3. Displaying Pressure Distribution on Body and Symmetry Plane

1.

Configure the following setting(s) of the boundary named Body:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of SymP:

4.

144

Instance Transform
1

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will be able to see the mesh around the blunt body, with the mesh length scale decreasing
near the body, but still coarse in the region of recirculation. By zooming in, you will be able to see
the layers of inflated elements near the body.

7.6.4. Creating Surface Streamlines to Display the Path of Air along the Surface
of the Body
In order to show the path of air along the surface of the blunt body, surface streamlines can be made
as follows:
1.

Turn off the visibility of Body, SymP and Vector 1.

2.

Create a new plane named Starter.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

> Method

YZ Plane

-0.1 [m]

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The plane appears just upstream of the blunt body.

6.

Turn off the visibility of the plane.

This hides the plane from view, although the plane still exists.

7.

Click Streamline

and click OK to accept the default name.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Type

Surface Streamline

Definition
> Surfaces

Body

Definition
> Start From

Locations

Definition
> Locations

Starter

Definition
> Max Points

100

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

145

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition
> Direction

9.

Forward

Click Apply.

The surface streamlines appear on half of the surface of the blunt body. They start near the upstream
end because the starting points were formed by projecting nodes from the plane to the blunt body.

7.6.5. Moving Objects

In CFD-Post, you can reposition some locator objects directly in the viewer by using the mouse.
1.

Turn on the visibility of the plane named Starter.

2.

Select the

3.

In the viewer, click the Starter plane to select it, then drag it along the X axis.

Single Select mouse pointer from the Selection Tools toolbar.

Notice that the streamlines are redrawn as the plane moves. The rate at which the streamlines are
redrawn is dependent on your computer's speed. If the streamlines are updated infrequently, you
may find it useful to move the mouse very slowly.

7.6.6. Creating a Surface Plot of y+

The velocity next to a no-slip wall boundary changes rapidly from a value of zero at the wall to the free
stream value a short distance away from the wall. This layer of high velocity gradient is known as the
boundary layer. Many meshes are not fine enough near a wall to accurately resolve the velocity profile
in the boundary layer. Wall functions can be used in these cases to apply an assumed functional shape
of the velocity profile. Other grids are fine enough that they do not require wall functions, and application
of the latter has little effect. The majority of cases fall somewhere in between these two extremes, where
the boundary layer is partially resolved by nodes near the wall and wall functions are used to supplement
accuracy where the nodes are not sufficiently clustered near the wall.
One indicator of the closeness of the first node to the wall is the dimensionless wall distance . It is
good practice to examine the values of
at the end of your simulation. At the lower limit, a value of
less than or equal to 11 indicates that the first node is within the laminar sublayer of the boundary
flow. Values larger than this indicate that an assumed logarithmic shape of the velocity profile is being
used to model the boundary layer portion between the wall and the first node. Ideally you should
confirm that there are several nodes (3 or more) resolving the boundary layer profile. If this is not observed, it is highly recommended that more nodes be added near the wall surfaces in order to improve
simulation accuracy. In this tutorial, a coarse mesh is used to reduce the run time. Thus, the grid is far
too coarse to resolve any of the boundary layer profile, and the solution is not highly accurate.
A surface plot is one which colors a surface according to the values of a variable: in this case,
surface plot of
can be obtained as follows:
1.

Turn off the visibility of all previous plots.

2.

Under the Outline tab, configure the following settings of BluntBodyDefault:

146

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

.A

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Yplus

View

[a]

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

Instance Transform
1

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to the right of the Variable dropdown menu to view
a full list of variables, including Yplus.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Under the Outline tab, configure the following settings of Body:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Yplus

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

5.

Instance Transform
1

Click Apply.

7.6.7. Demonstrating Power Syntax

This section demonstrates a power syntax macro used to evaluate the variation of any variable in the
direction of the X axis. This is an example of power syntax programming in CFD-Post.
A macro containing CCL and power syntax will be loaded by playing a session file. This macro will be
run by entering a line of power syntax in the Command Editor dialog box. The macro tells CFD-Post
to create slice planes, normal to the X axis, at 20 evenly-spaced locations from the beginning to the
end of the domain. On each plane, it measures and prints the minimum, maximum, and average values
for a specified variable (using conservative values). The planes are colored using the specified variable.

Note
The CFD-Post engine can respond to CCL commands issued directly, or to commands issued
using the graphical user interface. The Command Editor dialog box can be used to enter
any valid CCL command directly.
1.

Play the session file named BluntBodyDist.cse.

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.

Select Tools > Command Editor from the menu bar.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

147

Flow Around a Blunt Body

4.

Type the following line into the Command Editor dialog box (the quotation marks and the semi-colon
are required):
!BluntBodyDist("Velocity u");

5.

Click Process.
The minimum, maximum and average values of the variable at each X location are written to the
file BluntBody.txt. The results can be viewed by opening the file in a text editor.

You can also run the macro with a different variable.

To view the content of the session file (which contains explanatory comments), open the session file
in a text editor. It contains all of the CCL and power syntax commands and will provide a better understanding of how the macro works.

7.6.8. Viewing the Mesh Partitions (Parallel Only)

If you solved this tutorial in parallel, then an additional variable named Real partition number
will be available in CFD-Post
1.

Create an Isosurface of Real partition number equal to 1.

2.

Create a second Isosurface of Real partition number equal to 1.999.

The two Isosurfaces show the edges of the two partitions. The gap between the two plots shows the
overlap nodes. These were contained in both partitions 1 and 2.
When you have finished looking at the results, quit CFD-Post.

148

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 8: Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

This tutorial includes:
8.1.Tutorial Features
8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
8.3. Preparing the Working Directory
8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

8.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using CFX-4 Mesh Import.
Setting up a time dependent (transient) simulation.
Modeling buoyant flow.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Laminar

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Buoyant Flow
Boundary Conditions

Symmetry Plane
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Fixed
Temperature

Output Control
Timestep

Transient

Transient Results File

CFD-Post

Plots

Default Locators

Chart
Report
Other

Time Step Selection

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

149

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Component

Feature

Details
Transient Animation

8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to model a buoyancy-driven flow that requires the inclusion of gravitational
effects.
The model is a 2D partitioned cavity containing air with properties defined at 25C. The bottom of the
cavity is kept at a constant temperature of 75C, while the top is held constant at 5C. The cavity is also
tilted at an angle of 30 degrees to the horizontal.

The overall approach for solving this problem is to set up a transient simulation to see how the flow
develops when starting from stationary conditions. Because you are starting from stationary conditions,
there is no need to solve a steady-state simulation for use as the initial guess. You will then model the
buoyant flow and create a report outlining the results in CFD-Post. You will also create an animation
to see changes in temperature with time.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

8.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.
150

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

Buoyancy2D.geo
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Buoyancy2D.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 158).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Create a new case by selecting General.

4.

Select File > Save Case As and set File name to Buoyancy2D.

5.

Click Save.

8.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX-4 (*geo)

File name

Buoyancy2D.geo

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

151

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.4.2. Analysis Type

The default units and coordinate frame settings are suitable for this tutorial, but the analysis type must
be set to transient.
You will notice physics validation messages as the case is set to Transient. These errors will be fixed
later in the tutorial.
1.

Right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit or click Analysis Type
toolbar.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

2 [s]

[a]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

0.025 [s]

[b]

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

0 [s]

a. This is the total duration, in real time, for the simulation.

b. In this example the simulation moves forward in 0.025 s increments until the
total time is reached. The step size was determined as a function of the
temperature difference
and the length scale of the model

between the top and bottom of the cavity,

, according to:

, where is the gravity vector and is the

thermal expansivity. For details on computing a fluid time scale estimate, see
the theory guide.

3.

152

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

in the

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

8.4.3. Creating the Domain

You will model the cavity as if it were tilted at an angle of 30. You can do this by specifying horizontal
and vertical components of the gravity vector, which are aligned with the default coordinate axes, as
shown in the diagram above.
1.

Click Domain

, and set the name to Buoyancy2D.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Buoyancy2D:

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

Primitive 3D

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

153

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

-4.9 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

-8.5 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0.0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Temp.
Fluid
Models

40 [C] [a]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Turbulence
> Option

None
(Laminar)

a. This is an approximate representative domain temperature.

3.

Click OK.

8.4.4. Creating the Boundaries

8.4.4.1. Hot and Cold Wall Boundary
Create a wall boundary with a fixed temperature of 75 C on the bottom surface of the cavity, as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named hot.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

154

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALLHOT

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer

Value

> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named cold.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

75 [C]

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALLCOLD

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

6.

5 [C]

Click OK.

8.4.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary

A single symmetry plane boundary can be used for the front and back of the cavity. Symmetry, which
can make a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when the geometry and mesh are invariant
normal to the symmetry surface.
1.

Create a new boundary named SymP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SYMMET1, SYMMET2

[a]

a. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one region.

3.

Click OK.
The default adiabatic wall boundary will be applied automatically to the remaining boundaries.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

155

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.4.5. Setting Initial Values

You should set initial settings using the Automatic with Value option when defining a transient
simulation. Using this option, the first run will use the specified initial conditions (the air is at rest with
a temperature of 5 C) while subsequent runs will use results file data for initial conditions.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Value

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

3.

5 [C]

Click OK.

8.4.6. Setting Output Control

1.

156

Click Output Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure,
Temperature,
Velocity

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

Time Interval

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

0.1 [s]

[b]

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to select items if they do not appear
in the drop-down list. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple
items.
b. The Time Interval option specifies the simulation time
interval between the writing of each file. The time interval
will be set to 0.1 s, which is 4 times the time step that was
set up earlier. There is no need to set a smaller time interval
because it does not affect the solution accuracy. Choosing
a smaller time interval would simply result in more output
files.

5.

Click OK.

8.4.7. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

[a]

Convergence Criteria
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

157

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Tab

Setting

Value

> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1.E-4

[b]

a. The maximum coefficient loops option determines the maximum number of

iterations per time step. A value between 3 and 5 strikes a good balance between
solution quality and calculation time.
b. An RMS value of at least 1.E-5 is usually required for adequate convergence, but
the default value of 1.E-4 is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

3.

Click OK.

8.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Buoyancy2D.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by using the following procedure.

Note
Recall that the output displayed on the Out File tab of the CFX-Solver Manager is more
complicated for transient problems than for steady-state problems. Each time step consists
of several iterations, and after the time step, information about various quantities is printed.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

158

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

Click OK.

8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will create a customized report in CFD-Post. You will also, optionally, make an animation to see changes in temperature with time.

8.6.1. Simple Report

First, you will view a report that is created with little effort:
1.

Click the Report Viewer tab. Note that the report loads with some automatically-generated statistical
information.

2.

In the Outline tree view, under Report, experiment with the various settings for Mesh Report,
Physics Report and other report objects. These settings control the report contents. On the Report
Viewer tab, you can click Refresh to see the changes to your report.

8.6.2. Plots for Customized Reports

Here, you will create the following objects in preparation for generating a more customized report:
Contour plot of temperature
Point locators (for observing temperature)
Comment
Figure showing the contour plot and point locator
Time chart showing the temperature at the point locator
Table.

8.6.2.1. Contour Plot of Temperature

1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab and right-click a blank area of the viewer, then select Predefined Camera > View
From -Z.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu.

3.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

4.

Set Locations to SymP.

5.

Set Variable to Temperature.

6.

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows the temperature at the end of the simulation, since CFD-Post loads values for
the last time step by default. You can load different time steps using the Timestep Selector dialog box,
accessible by selecting Tools > Timestep Selector from the main menu.
Before proceeding, turn off the visibility of the contour plot.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

159

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.6.2.2. Point Locators

Two points will be created to generate a time chart of temperature vs. time later on in this tutorial. The
two points were chosen to be located half way in between the bottom and top cavity, close to where
the average temperature is going to be.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Point.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Set Method to XYZ.

4.

Set Point coordinates to 0.098, 0.05, 0.00125.

5.

Click Apply.
Note the location of Point 1 in the viewer.

6.

Right-click the Point 1 object in the tree view and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

7.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

8.

Right-click the Point 2 object in the tree view and select Edit from the shortcut menu.

9.

Change the x-coordinate to 0.052.

10. Click Apply.

Note the location of Point 2 in the viewer.

8.6.2.3. Comment
1.

Click Create comment

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

A comment object appears in the tree view, under the Report object.

3.

Set Heading to Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity.

4.

In the large text box, type:

This is a sample paragraph.

8.6.2.4. Figure
Figures are CCL objects that can be used to store and switch between different views in a given viewport.
By selecting a figure, the information contained in the figure, such as the camera angle, zoom level,
lighting and the visibility setting of each object in the tree view, is applied to the active viewport and
is usable in reports.
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab.

2.

Select Insert > Figure from the main menu.

160

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

The Make copies of objects check box determines whether or not the objects that are visible in
the viewer are copied. If objects are copied, then the copies are used in the figure instead of the
originals. Since you are not using multiple views or figures, the check box setting does not matter.
A figure object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.

8.6.2.5. Time Chart of Temperature

Time charts use expressions or a point locator to plot the variation of a scalar value with time. In this
tutorial, the variation of temperature versus time will be plotted.
1.

Select Insert > Chart from the main menu.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Set Type to XY-Transient or Sequence.

4.

Set Title to Temperature versus Time.

5.

Click the Data Series tab.

6.

Set Name to Temperature at Point 1.

7.

Set Location to Point 1.

8.

Click the X Axis tab.

9.

Set Data Selection > Expression to Time.

10. Click the Y Axis tab.

11. Set Data Selection > Variable to Temperature.
12. Ensure that the Refresh chart on Apply check box (at the bottom of the details view) is selected.
This causes the chart to be regenerated in the Chart Viewer tab each time you apply changes in
the details view. (When the Refresh chart on Apply check box is cleared, the chart will be regenerated only when you manually refresh it. One way to refresh the chart is to click the Refresh
button at the top of the Chart Viewer tab.)
13. Click Apply.
A chart object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.
It may take some time for the chart to appear because every transient results file will be loaded in
order to generate the time chart.
14. Click New

(on the Data Series tab).

15. Set Name to Temperature at Point 2.

16. Set Location to Point 2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

161

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

17. Click Apply.
A second chart line will appear in the chart, representing the temperature at Point 2.

8.6.2.6. Table of Temperature Values

1.

Select Insert > Table from the main menu.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

A table object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.

3.

Set the following:

Cell

Value

A1

Location

A2

Point 1

A3

Point 2

B1

Temperature

B2

=probe(Temperature)@Point 1

B3

=probe(Temperature)@Point 2

The table shows temperatures at the end of the simulation, since CFD-Post loads values for the last
time step by default. You can load different time steps using the Timestep Selector dialog box, accessible
by selecting Tools > Timestep Selector.

8.6.3. Customized Report

Right-click the Report object and select Refresh Preview from the shortcut menu. Look at the report
in the Report Viewer tab. Note that, in addition to the automatically-generated objects that you saw
earlier when creating a simple report, this report also includes the customized figure, time chart and
table described above.

8.6.4. Animations
You may want to create an animation of the buoyant flow over time. Use the animation feature to see
the changing temperature field. The animation feature was used in Flow from a Circular Vent (p. 105).

8.6.5. Completion
When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

162

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 9: Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

This tutorial includes:
9.1.Tutorial Features
9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
9.3. Preparing the Working Directory
9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
9.7. Further Discussion

9.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will set up a 2D problem in which you:
Import a mesh.
Set up appropriate boundary conditions for a free surface simulation. (Free surface simulations are more
sensitive to incorrect boundary and initial guess settings than other more basic models.)
Use mesh adaption to refine the mesh where the volume fraction gradient is greatest. (The refined mesh
aids in the development of a sharp interface between the liquid and gas.)
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady-state

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase

Homogeneous Model

Boundary Conditions

Inlet
Opening
Outlet
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No Slip

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
Mesh Adaption
Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

163

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Component

Feature

Details

CFD-Post

Plots

Default Locators
Isosurface
Polyline
Sampling Plane
Vector
Volume

Other

Chart Creation
Title/Text
Viewing the Mesh

9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates the simulation of a free surface flow.
The geometry consists of a 2D channel in which the bottom of the channel is interrupted by a semicircular bump of radius 30 mm. The problem environment comprises air at 1 Pa and isothermal water; the
normal inlet speed is 0.26 m/s; the incoming water has a turbulence intensity of 5%. The flow upstream
of the bump is subcritical. The downstream boundary conditions (the height of the water) were estimated
for this tutorial; you can do this using an analytical 1D calculation or data tables for flow over a bump.

A mesh is provided. You will create a two-phase homogeneous setting and the expressions that will
be used in setting initial values and boundary conditions. Later, you will use mesh adaption to improve
the accuracy of the downstream simulation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)

164

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

9.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
Bump2DExpressions.ccl
Bump2Dpatran.out
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Bump2D.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 176).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type Bump2D.

6.

Click Save.

9.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

PATRAN Neutral (*out *neu)

Filename

Bump2Dpatran.out
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

165

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Setting

Value

Options
> Mesh units

3.

Click Open.

4.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From
-Z from the shortcut menu.

9.4.2. Viewing the Region Labels

Enable the display of region labels so that you can see where you will define boundaries later in this
tutorial:
1.

In the Outline tree view, edit Case Options > Labels and Markers.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Settings

Show Labels

(Selected)

Show Labels
> Show Primitive 3D Labels

(Selected)

Show Labels
> Show Primitive 2D Labels

3.

(Selected)

Click OK.

9.4.3. Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions

Simulation of free surface flows usually requires defining boundary and initial conditions to set up appropriate pressure and volume fraction fields. You will need to create expressions using CEL (CFX Expression Language) to define these conditions.
In this simulation, the following conditions are set and require expressions:
An inlet boundary where the volume fraction above the free surface is 1 for air and 0 for water, and below
the free surface is 0 for air and 1 for water.
A pressure-specified outlet boundary, where the pressure above the free surface is constant and the pressure
below the free surface is a hydrostatic distribution. This requires you to know the approximate height of
the fluid at the outlet. In this case, an analytical solution for 1D flow over a bump was used to determine
the value for DownH in Creating Expressions in CEL (p. 167). The simulation is not sensitive to the exact outlet
fluid height, so an approximation is sufficient. You will examine the effect of the outlet boundary condition
in the postprocessing section and confirm that it does not affect the validity of the results. It is necessary to
specify such a boundary condition to force the flow downstream of the bump into the supercritical regime.
An initial pressure field for the domain with a similar pressure distribution to that of the outlet boundary.

166

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Either create expressions using the Expressions workspace or read in expressions from the example
file provided:
Creating Expressions in CEL (p. 167)
Reading Expressions From a File (p. 167)

9.4.3.1. Creating Expressions in CEL

The expressions you create in this step are the same as the ones provided in Reading Expressions From
a File (p. 167), so you can choose to follow either set of instructions.
1.

Right-click Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expressions in the tree view and
select Insert > Expression.

2.

Set the name to UpH and click OK to create the upstream free surface height.

3.

Set Definition to 0.069 [m], and then click Apply.

4.

Use the same method to create the expressions listed in the table below. These are expressions for the
downstream free surface height, the fluid density, the buoyancy reference density, the calculated density
of the fluid (density - buoyancy reference density), the upstream volume fractions of air and water, the
upstream pressure distribution, the downstream volume fractions of air and water, and the downstream
pressure distribution.

5.

Name

Definition

DownH

0.022 [m]

DenWater

997 [kg m^-3]

DenRef

1.185 [kg m^-3]

DenH

(DenWater - DenRef )

UpVFAir

step((y-UpH)/1[m])

UpVFWater

1-UpVFAir

UpPres

DenH*g*UpVFWater*(UpH-y)

DownVFAir

step((y-DownH)/1[m])

DownVFWater

1-DownVFAir

DownPres

DenH*g*DownVFWater*(DownH-y)

Proceed to Creating the Domain (p. 168).

9.4.3.2. Reading Expressions From a File

1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

2.

In the Import CCL dialog box, ensure that the Append option is selected.

3.

Select Bump2DExpressions.ccl.

4.

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

167

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

5.

After the file has been imported, use the Expressions tree view to view the expressions that have been
created.

9.4.4. Creating the Domain

Set up a homogeneous, two-fluid environment:
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation > Flow
Analysis 1 branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid named Air.

4.

Confirm that the following settings are configured:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Air

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Material

5.

Click Add new item

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Air at 25 C

and create a new fluid named Water.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water
> Material

Water

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model

168

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.[b]

-g

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density [c]
Fluid
Models

DenRef

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model [d]

(Selected)

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model
> Option

Standard

Heat Transfer
> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

Turbulence
> Option

k-Epsilon

a. The models selected here describe how the fluids interact. No mass transfer
between the phases occurs in this example. You do not need to model surface
tension.
b. You need to click Enter Expression

beside the field first.

c. Always set Buoyancy Reference Density to the density of the least dense fluid
in free surface calculations.
d. The homogeneous model solves for a single solution field.

7.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

169

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

9.4.5. Creating the Boundaries

9.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named inflow.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INFLOW

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

0.26 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence

Fluid
Values

> Eddy Length Scale

UpH

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFAir

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

UpVFWater

Click OK.

9.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

170

Create a new boundary named outflow.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUTFLOW

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

DownPres

Click OK.

9.4.5.3. Symmetry Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named front.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

FRONT

[a]

a. Symmetry, which makes a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when

geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named back.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

BACK

Click OK.

9.4.5.4. Opening and Wall Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

171

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Entrainment

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Turbulence

Fluid Values

> Option

Zero Gradient

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

1.0

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named bottom.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

0.0

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BOTTOM1, BOTTOM2,
BOTTOM3

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Wall Roughness
> Option

6.

172

Smooth Wall

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

9.4.6. Setting Initial Values

Set up the initial values to be consistent with the inlet boundary conditions:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0.26 [m s^-1]
[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W
Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure

Fluid
Settings

> Relative Pressure

UpPres

Fluid Specific Initialization

Air

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

173

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFAir

Fluid Specific Initialization

Water

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFWater

a. From the problem statement.

3.

Click OK.

9.4.7. Setting Mesh Adaption Parameters

To improve the resolution of the interface between the air and the water, set up the mesh adaption
settings:
1.

Click Mesh Adaption

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Activate Adaption

(Selected)

Save Intermediate Files

(Cleared)

Adaption Criteria

174

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Variables List

Air.Volume Fraction

Adaption Criteria
> Max. Num. Steps

Adaption Criteria
> Option

Multiple of Initial
Mesh

Adaption Criteria
> Node Factor

Adaption Convergence Criteria

Advanced
Options

3.

> Max. Iter. per Step

100

Node Alloc. Parameter

1.6

Number of Levels

Click OK.

9.4.8. Setting the Solver Controls

Note
Setting Max. Iterations to 200 (below) and Number of (Adaption) Levels to 2 with a Max.
Iter. per Step of 100 time steps each (in the previous section), results in a total maximum
number of time steps of 400 (2*100+200=400).

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

200

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control

Advanced
Options

> Physical Timescale

0.25 [s]

Multiphase Control

(Selected)

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

175

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling
> Option

Coupled

[b]

a. Estimated from the time it takes the water to flow over the bump.
b. The Coupled Volume Fraction solution algorithm typically converges better than
the Segregated Volume Faction algorithm for buoyancy-driven problems. The
Segregated Volume Faction algorithm would have required a significantly smaller
timescale (0.05 [s]).

Note
Selecting these options on the solver control activates the Coupled Volume Fraction
solution algorithm. This algorithm typically converges better than the Segregated Volume
Faction algorithm for buoyancy-driven problems such as this tutorial. The Segregated
Volume Faction algorithm would have required a 0.05 second timescale, as compared
with 0.25 seconds for the Coupled Volume Fraction algorithm.

3.

Click OK.

9.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Bump2D.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Click Start Run.
Within 100 iterations after CFX-Solver Manager has started, the first adaption step is performed. Information written to the .out file includes the number of elements refined and the size of the new mesh.
176

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

After mesh refinement, there is a jump in the residual levels. This is because the solution from the old
mesh is interpolated onto the new mesh. A new residual plot also appears for the W-Mom-Bulk equation.
Hexahedral mesh elements are refined orthogonally, so the mesh is no longer 2D (it is more than 1
element thick in the Z direction). Convergence to the target residual level is achieved.

It is common for convergence in a residual sense to be difficult to obtain in a free surface simulation,
due to the presence of small waves at the surface preventing the residuals from dropping to the target
level. This is more frequently a problem in the subcritical flow regime, as the waves can travel upstream.
In the supercritical regime, the waves tend to get carried downstream and out the domain. To satisfy
convergence in these cases, monitor the value of a global quantity (for example, drag for flow around
a ships hull) to see when a steady-state value is reached.
Where there is no obvious global quantity to monitor, you should view the results to see where the
solution is changing. You can do this by running transient (with time steps that are small enough to
capture transient effects) for a few time steps, starting from a results file that you think is converged
or from backup results files you have written at different time steps.
In both cases, look to see where the results are changing (this could be due to the presence of small
transient waves). Also confirm that the value of quantities that you are interested in (for example,
downstream fluid height for this case) has reached a steady-state value.
1.

When a dialog box is displayed at the end of the run, select Post-Process Results.

2.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK.

9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Display the distribution of volume fraction of water in the domain:
1.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From
-Z.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the viewer.

3.

In the tree view, edit Bump2D_001 > Default Domain > front.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

177

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Water.Volume
Fraction

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Observe the plot, then clear the check box next to front.

9.6.1. Creating Velocity Vector Plots

The next step involves creating a sampling plane upon which to display velocity vectors for Water.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Plane to create a new plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Plane Bounds
> Type

Rectangular

Plane Bounds
> X Size

1.25 [m]

[a]

Plane Bounds
> Y Size

0.3 [m]

Plane Bounds

Render

> X Angle

0 [degree]

Plane Type

Sample

X Samples

160

Y Samples

40

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

[b]

a. The Plane Bounds settings overlap the plane with the wireframe. You can
experiment with other values and click Apply to see the results.
b. The Plane Samples settings produce square elements. You can experiment with
other values and click Apply to see the results.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Clear the check box next to Plane 1.

178

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.

Create a new vector named Vector 1.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition

Symbol

> Variable [a]

Water.Velocity

Symbol Size

0.5

a. Because fluids in a free-surface calculation share the same velocity field, only
the velocity of the first non-vapor fluid is available. The other allowed velocities
are superficial velocities. For details, see Further Postprocessing (p. 184).

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Symbol

9.

Value

> Variable

Air.Superficial
Velocity

Symbol Size

0.15

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

Click Apply.

9.6.2. Viewing Mesh Refinement

In this section, you will view the surface mesh on one of the symmetry boundaries, create volume objects
to show where the mesh was modified, and create a vector plot to visualize the added mesh nodes.
1.

Clear the check box next to Vector 1.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the Viewer.

3.

In Outline under Default Domain, edit front.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

179

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

5.

Click Apply.
The mesh has been refined near the free surface.
In the transition region between different levels of refinement, tetrahedral and pyramidal elements are
used because it is not possible to recreate hexahedral elements in CFX. Near the inlet, the aspect ratio
of these elements increases.
Avoid performing mesh refinement on high-aspect-ratio hex meshes as this will produce high aspect
ratio tetrahedral-elements and result in poor mesh quality.
Figure 9.1: Mesh around the bump

6.

Create a new volume named first refinement elements.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Refinement Level

[a]

Definition
> Mode

At Value

Definition

Render

> Value

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

180

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color
a. Click More variables

8.

(Green)

to access the Refinement Level value.

Click Apply.
You will see a band of green, which indicates the elements that include nodes added during the
first mesh adaption.

9.

Create a new volume named second refinement elements.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Refinement Level

Definition
> Mode

At Value

Definition
> Value

Color

Color

White

Render

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

(Black)

11. Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

181

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

You will see a band of white (with black lines); this indicates the elements that include nodes added
during the second mesh adaption.
12. Zoom in to a region where the mesh has been refined.
The Refinement Level variable holds an integer value at each node, which is either 0, 1, or 2 (because
you used a maximum of two adaption levels).
The nodal values of refinement level will be visualized next.
13. Create a new vector named Vector 2.
14. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition
> Variable

(Any Vector
Variable)

Color
Symbol

[a]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Refinement Level

Symbol

Cube

Symbol Size

0.02

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

a. The variables magnitude and direction do not matter because you will change
the vector symbol to a cube with a normalized size.

15. Click Apply.

In Vector 2, Blue nodes (Refinement Level 0 according to the color legend) are part of the original
mesh. Green nodes (Refinement Level 1) were added during the first adaption step. Red nodes (Refinement Level 2) were added during the second adaption step. Note that some elements contain combinations of blue, green, and red nodes.

9.6.3. Creating an Isosurface to Show the Free Surface

Later in this tutorial, you will create a chart to show the variation in free surface height along the
channel. The data for the chart will be sampled along a polyline that follows the free surface. To make
the polyline, you will use the intersection between one of the symmetry planes and an isosurface that
follows the free surface. Start by creating an isosurface on the free surface:
1.

Turn off the visibility for all objects except Wireframe.

2.

Create a new isosurface named Isosurface 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

182

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

Value

Water.Volume
Fraction

Definition
> Value

4.

0.5

Click Apply.
Creating isosurfaces using this method is a good way to visualize a free surface in a 3D simulation.

5.

Right-click any blank area in the viewer, select Predefined Camera, then select Isometric View (Y up).

9.6.4. Creating a Polyline that Follows the Free Surface

Create a polyline along the isosurface that you created in the previous step:
1.

Turn off the visibility of Isosurface 1.

2.

Create a new polyline named Polyline 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Boundary
Intersection

Boundary List

front

Intersect With

Isosurface 1

Click Apply.
A green line is displayed that follows the high-Z edge of the isosurface.

9.6.5. Creating a Chart to Show the Height of the Surface

Create a chart that plots the free surface height using the polyline that you created in the previous
step:
1.

Create a new chart named Chart 1.

The Chart Viewer tab is selected.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Free Surface Height

for Flow over a
Bump

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

183

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Data Series

Name

free surface height

Location

Polyline 1

X Axis

Variable

Y Axis

Variable

Line Display

Symbols

Rectangle

Click Apply.

As discussed in Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions (p. 166), an approximate outlet
elevation is imposed as part of the boundary, even though the flow is supercritical. The chart illustrates
the effect of this, in that the water level rises just before the exit plane. It is evident from this plot that
imposing the elevation does not affect the upstream flow.
The chart shows a wiggle in the elevation of the free surface interface at the inlet. This is related to an
over-specification of conditions at the inlet because both the inlet velocity and elevation were specified.
For a subcritical inlet, only the velocity or the total energy should be specified. The wiggle is due to a
small inconsistency between the specified elevation and the elevation computed by the solver to obtain
critical conditions at the bump. The wiggle is analogous to one found if pressure and velocity were
both specified at a subsonic inlet in a converging-diverging nozzle with choked flow at the throat.

9.6.6. Further Postprocessing

You may want to create some plots using the <Fluid>.Superficial Velocity variables. This is
the fluid volume fraction multiplied by the fluid velocity and is sometimes called the volume flux. It is
useful to use this variable for vector plots in separated multiphase flow, as you will only see a vector
where a significant amount of that phase exists.

Tip
You can right-click an existing vector plot and select a new vector variable.

9.7. Further Discussion

For supercritical free surface flows, the supercritical outlet boundary is usually the most appropriate
boundary for the outlet because it does not rely on the specification of the outlet pressure distribution
(which depends on an estimate of the free surface height at the outlet). The supercritical outlet
boundary requires a relative pressure specification for the gas only; no pressure information is required
for the liquid at the outlet. For this tutorial, the relative gas pressure at the outlet should be set to 0 Pa.
The supercritical outlet condition may admit multiple solutions. To find the supercritical solution, it is
often necessary to start with a static pressure outlet condition (as previously done in this tutorial) or
an average static pressure condition where the pressure is set consistent with an elevation to drive the
solution into the supercritical regime. The outlet condition can then be changed to the supercritical
option.

184

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 10: Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

This tutorial includes:
10.1.Tutorial Features
10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
10.3. Preparing the Working Directory
10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

10.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a supersonic flow simulation.
Using the Shear Stress Transport turbulence model to accurately resolve flow around a wing surface.
Defining a custom vector to display pressure distribution.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Supersonic)
Outlet (Supersonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Free-Slip

CFD-Post

Domain Interfaces

Fluid-Fluid (No Frame

Change)

Timestep

Maximum Timescale

Plots

Contour
Vector

Other

Variable Details View

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

185

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This example demonstrates the use of CFX in simulating supersonic flow over a symmetric NACA0012
airfoil at 0 angle of attack. A 2D section of the wing is modeled. A 2D hexahedral mesh is provided
that you will import into CFX-Pre.
The environment is 300 K air at 1 atmosphere that passes the wing at 600 m/s. The turbulence intensity
is low (.01) with an eddy length scale of .02 meters.

A mesh is provided. You will create a domain that contains three regions that will be connected by
fluid-fluid interfaces. To solve the simulation, you will start with a conservative time scale that gradually
increases towards the fluid residence time as the residuals decrease.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

10.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

WingSPSMesh.out

186

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run WingSPS.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 193).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type WingSPS.

6.

Click Save.

10.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

PATRAN Neutral (*out *neu)

File name

WingSPSMesh.out

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

Click Open.

4.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric
View (Y up) from the shortcut menu.

10.4.2. Creating the Domain

1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

187

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

2.

Edit Default Domain and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

WING_Elements

Fluid and Particle

Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
[a]

Fluid Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Total Energy

[b]

Turbulence
> Option

Shear Stress Transport

a. When using an ideal gas, it is important to set an appropriate reference pressure

because some properties depend on the absolute pressure level.
b. The Total Energy model is appropriate for high-speed flows because it includes
kinetic energy effects.

3.

Click OK.

10.4.3. Creating the Boundaries

10.4.3.1. Creating an Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INLET

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

188

Supersonic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel. & Pressure

Mass And Momentum

> Rel. Static Pres.

0 [Pa]

Mass And Momentum

>U

600 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.01

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.02 [m]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK.

10.4.3.2. Creating an Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUTLET

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

3.

Supersonic

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

189

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.4.3.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SIDE1

[a]

a. Symmetry, which can make a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when
geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SIDE2

6.

Click OK.

7.

Create a new boundary named Bottom.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

9.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

BOTTOM

Click OK.

10.4.3.4. Creating a Free Slip Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

190

Free Slip Wall

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

10.4.3.5. Creating a Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named WingSurface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WING_Nodes

[a]

a. If particular items do not appear in the drop-down list, click the Ellipsis
to see all available items.

3.

icon

Click OK.

10.4.4. Creating Domain Interfaces

The imported mesh contains three regions that will be connected with domain interfaces.
1.

Create a new domain interface named Domain Interface 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Primitive 2D A

Interface Side 2
> Region List

3.

Primitive 2D, Primitive 2D B

Click OK.

10.4.5. Setting Initial Values

For high-speed compressible flow, the CFX-Solver usually requires sensible initial conditions to be set
for the velocity field.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

191

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

Tab

Setting

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

600 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Option

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK.

10.4.6. Setting the Solver Controls

The residence time for the fluid is the length of the domain divided by the speed of the fluid; using
values from the problem specification, the result is approximately:
70 [m] / 600 [m s^-1] = 0.117 [s]
In the next step, you will set a maximum timescale, then the solver will start with a conservative time
scale that gradually increases towards the fluid-residence time as the residuals decrease.
1.

192

Click Solver Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Maximum Timescale

(Selected)

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Maximum Timescale
> Maximum Timescale

0.1 [s]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

3.

1.0e-05

Click OK.

10.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

WingSPS.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed, with the CFXSolver input file set.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

193

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following topics will be discussed:
Displaying Mach Information (p. 194)
Displaying Pressure Information (p. 194)
Displaying Temperature Information (p. 195)
Displaying Pressure With User Vectors (p. 195)

10.6.1. Displaying Mach Information

The first view configured shows that the bulk of the flow over the wing has a Mach Number of over
1.5.
1.

To best orient the view, select View From -Z by typing Shift +Z.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the Viewer.

3.

Create a new contour named SymP2Mach.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Mach Number

Range

User Specified

Min

Max

# of Contours

21

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Mach.

10.6.2. Displaying Pressure Information

To display pressure information, create a contour plot that shows the pressure field:
1.

Create a new contour named SymP2Pressure.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

194

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Pressure

Range

Global

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Pressure.

10.6.3. Displaying Temperature Information

You can confirm that a significant energy loss occurs around the wing's leading edge by plotting temperature on SymP2.
1.

Create a new contour named SymP2Temperature.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Temperature

Range

Global

Click Apply.
The contour shows that the temperature at the wing's leading edge is approximately 180 K higher
than the inlet temperature.

4.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Temperature.

10.6.4. Displaying Pressure With User Vectors

You can also create a user vector to show the pressure acting on the wing:
1.

Create a new variable named Variable 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Name

Setting

Value

Variable
1

Vector

(Selected)

X Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
X

Y Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
Y

Z Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
Z

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Create a new vector named Vector 1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

195

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

WingSurface

Variable

Variable 1

Symbol Size

0.04

Symbol

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Zoom in on the wing in order to see the created vector plot.

196

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 11: Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

This tutorial includes:
11.1.Tutorial Features
11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
11.3. Preparing the Working Directory
11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

11.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using a rough wall boundary in CFX-Pre to simulate the pipe wall
Creating a fully developed inlet velocity profile using the CFX Expression Language
Setting up a Particle Tracking simulation in CFX-Pre to trace sand particles
Animating particle tracks in CFD-Post to trace sand particles through the domain
Performing quantitative calculation of average static pressure in CFD-Post on the outlet boundary.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

None

Particle Tracking
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Profile)
Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Rough

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Plots

Animation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

197

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Component

Feature

Details
Default Locators
Particle Track
Point
Slice Plane

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Movie Generation
Particle Track
Animation
Quantitative Calculation
Symmetry, Reflection
Plane

11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Pumps and compressors are commonplace. An estimate of the pumping requirement can be calculated
based on the height difference between source and destination and head loss estimates for the pipe
and any obstructions/joints along the way. Investigating the detailed flow pattern around a valve or
joint however, can lead to a better understanding of why these losses occur. Improvements in valve/joint
design can be simulated using CFD, and implemented to reduce pumping requirements and cost.

Flows can contain particulates that affect the flow and cause erosion to pipe and valve components.
You can use the particle-tracking capability of CFX to simulate these effects.
In this example, water flows at 5 m/s through a 20 mm radius pipe that has a rough internal surface.
The velocity profile is assumed to be fully developed at the pipe inlet. The flow, which is controlled by
a butterfly valve set at an angle of 55 to the vertical axis, contains sand particles ranging in size from
50 to 500 microns. The equivalent sand grain roughness is 0.2 mm.
The reference temperature is 300 K; the reference pressure is 1 atm.
A mesh is provided. You will create sand particles and a domain that contains water; for one part of
the simulation the water and sand will be fully coupled, and for the other part of the simulation they
will be one-way coupled. To increase the accuracy of the simulation, the inlet will be given a velocity
profile that simulates a fully-developed boundary layer.
To solve the simulation, you will create two sets of identical particles. The first set will be fully coupled
to predict the effect of the particles on the continuous phase flow field and enable the particles to influence the flow field. The second set will be one-way coupled but will contain a much higher number

198

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

of particles to provide a more accurate calculation of the particle volume fraction and local forces on
walls, but without affecting the flow field.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

11.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

PipeValveMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run PipeValve.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 215).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type PipeValve.

6.

Click Save.

11.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

199

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

PipeValveMesh.gtm

Click Open.

11.4.2. Defining the Properties of the Sand

The material properties of the sand particles used in the simulation need to be defined. Heat transfer
and radiation modeling are not used in this simulation, so the only properties that need to be defined
are the density of the sand and the diameter range.
To calculate the effect of the particles on the continuous fluid, between 100 and 1000 particles are
usually required. However, if accurate information about the particle volume fraction or local forces on
wall boundaries is required, then a much larger number of particles must be modeled.
When you create the domain, choose either full coupling or one-way coupling between the particle
and continuous phase. Full coupling is needed to predict the effect of the particles on the continuous
phase flow field but has a higher CPU cost than one-way coupling; one-way coupling simply predicts
the particle paths during postprocessing based on the flow field, but without affecting the flow field.
To optimize CPU usage, you can create two sets of identical particles. The first set should be fully coupled
and around 200 particles will be used. This allows the particles to influence the flow field. The second
set uses one-way coupling but contains 5000 particles. This provides a more accurate calculation of the
particle volume fraction and local forces on walls. (These values are defined in the inlet boundary
definition.)
For this tutorial you will create a "Sand Fully Coupled" boundary condition that has 200 particles moving
with a mass flow rate of 0.01 kg/s and a "Sand One Way Coupled" boundary condition that has 5000
particles moving with a mass flow rate of 0.01 kg/s. In both cases the sand density is 2300 [kg m^-3];
particle diameters range from 50 e-6 m to 500 e-6 m, with an average diameter of 250 e-6 m and a
standard deviation of 70 e-6 m. You will set a Finnie erosion model with a velocity power factor of 2
and a reference velocity of 1 m/s.
1.

Click Insert Material

then create a new material named Sand Fully Coupled.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Material Group

Particle Solids

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Material
Properties

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

2300 [kg m^-3]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

200

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

0 [J kg^-1 K^-1]

[b]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State
> Option

Specified Point

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State
> Ref. Temperature

300 [K]

[a]

a. From the problem description.

b. Specific Heat Capacity is set to 0 because heat transfer is not modeled in this tutorial.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Under Materials, right-click Sand Fully Coupled and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

5.

Rename the duplicate as Sand One Way Coupled.

6.

Sand One Way Coupled is created with properties identical to Sand Fully Coupled.

11.4.3. Creating the Domain

Set up an environment that has water and sand defined in two ways; one in which the sand is fully
coupled, and one in which the sand is one-way coupled:
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation > Flow
Analysis 1 branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1.

4.

Click Add new item

5.

Set Fluid and Particle Definitions > Water > Material to Water.

6.

Create a new fluid definition named Sand Fully Coupled.

to create a new fluid definition named Water.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

201

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

7.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions > Sand Fully Coupled, configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Material

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Morphology
> Option

Particle
Transport Solid

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution

(Selected)

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Normal in
Diameter by
Mass

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Minimum Diameter

50e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Maximum Diameter

500e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mean Diameter

250e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Std. Deviation

70e-6 [m]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Materials dialog box,
then select Particle Solids > Sand Fully Coupled.

8.

Create a new fluid definition named Sand One Way Coupled.

9.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions > Sand One Way Coupled, configure the following setting(s):

202

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Material

Sand One Way

Coupled

[a]

Morphology
> Option

Particle
Transport Solid

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution

(Selected)

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Normal in
Diameter by
Mass

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Minimum Diameter

50e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Maximum Diameter

500e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mean Diameter

250e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Std. Deviation

70e-6 [m]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Materials dialog box,
then select Particle Solids > Sand One Way
Coupled.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Domain Models

Value

> Pressure

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

203

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab
Fluid
Models

Setting

Value

> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence

Fluid
Specific
Models

> Option

k-Epsilon[a]

Fluid

Sand Fully
Coupled

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Option

Finnie

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Vel. Power Factor

2.0

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Reference Velocity

1 [m s^-1]

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled

(Selected)

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Option

Finnie

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Vel. Power Factor

2.0

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled

204

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Erosion Model

Fluid Pair
Models

> Reference Velocity

1 [m s^-1]

Fluid Pair

Water | Sand
Fully Coupled

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Coupling

Fully Coupled

Fluid Pairs
>Water | Sand Fully Coupled
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller
Naumann

Fluid Pair

[b]

Water | Sand
One Way
Coupled

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Coupling

One-way
Coupling

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand One Way Coupled
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller
Naumann

[b]

a. The turbulence model applies only to the continuous phase and not the particle
phases.
b. The Schiller Naumann drag model is appropriate for sparsely-distributed, solid
spherical particles.

11. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

205

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

11.4.4. Creating the Inlet Velocity Profile

In previous tutorials you have often defined a uniform velocity profile at an inlet boundary. This means
that the inlet velocity near to the walls is the same as that at the center of the inlet. If you look at the
results from these simulations, you will see that downstream of the inlet a boundary layer will develop,
so that the downstream near wall velocity is much lower than the inlet near wall velocity.
You can simulate an inlet more accurately by defining an inlet velocity profile, so that the boundary
layer is already fully developed at the inlet. The one seventh power law will be used in this tutorial to
describe the profile at the pipe inlet. The equation for this is:
(11.1)
where
centerline.

is the pipe centerline velocity,

is the pipe radius, and

is the distance from the pipe

You can create a non-uniform (profile) boundary condition by doing one of the following:
Creating an expression using CEL that describes the inlet profile. Using a CEL expression is the easiest way
to create the profile.
Creating a User CEL Function that uses a user subroutine (linked to the CFX-Solver during execution) to
describe the inlet profile. The User CEL Function method is more complex, but is provided here as an example
of how to use this feature.
Loading a boundary condition profile file (a file that contains boundary condition profile data).
Profiles created from data files are not used in this tutorial, but are used in the tutorial Flow in a
Process Injection Mixing Pipe (p. 89).

Note
For complex profiles, it may be necessary to use a User CEL Function or a boundary condition
profile file.
Use a CEL expression to define the velocity profile for the inlet boundary:
1.

Click Insert Expression

and create the following expressions using Equation 11.1 (p. 206) and values
from the problem description:
Name

Definition

Rmax

20 [mm]

Wmax

5 [m s^-1]

Wprof

Wmax*(abs(1-r/Rmax)^0.143)

In the definition of Wprof, the variable r (radius) is a CFX System Variable defined as:
(11.2)
In this equation, and are defined as directions 1 and 2 (X and Y for Cartesian coordinate frames)
respectively, in the selected reference coordinate frame.
206

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Continue with the tutorial at Creating the Boundary Conditions (p. 207).

11.4.5. Creating the Boundary Conditions

11.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Mass And Momentum

>U

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values
[b]

>W

Wprof

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Behavior
> Define Particle Behavior

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

[c]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

207

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>W

Wprof

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Option

Uniform
Injection

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Option

Direct
Specification

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

200

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Mass Flow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.01 [kg s^-1]

Boundary Conditions

Sand One Way

Coupled

Boundary Conditions

208

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Sand One Way Coupled

> Particle Behavior
> Define Particle Behavior

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

[c]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>W

Wprof

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Option

Uniform
Injection

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Option

Direct
Specification

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

209

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

5000

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Particle Mass Flow Rate
> Mass Flow Rate
a. Use the Expressions details view

0.01 [kg s^-1]

to enter Wprof.

b. Do not select Particle Diameter Distribution. The diameter distribution was

defined when creating the domain; this option would override those settings
for this boundary only.
c. Instead of manually specifying the same velocity profile as the fluid, you can
also select the Zero Slip Velocity option.

3.

Click OK.

One-way coupled particles are tracked as a function of the fluid flow field. The latter is not influenced
by the one-way coupled particles. The fluid flow will therefore be influenced by the 0.01 [kg s^-1] flow
of two-way coupled particles, but not by the 0.01 [kg s^-1] flow of one-way coupled particles.

11.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

outlet

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

210

Average Static
Pressure

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

11.4.5.3. Symmetry Plane Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named symP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

symP

[a]

a. Symmetry can be used when geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the
symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

11.4.5.4. Pipe Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named pipe wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

pipe wall

Boundary Wall Roughness

Details
> Option

Rough Wall

Wall Roughness

Fluid
Values

> Sand Grain Roughness

0.2 [mm]

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Option

Restitution
Coefficient

Boundary Conditions
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

211

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

> Sand Fully Coupled

> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.8

[b]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Parallel Coeff.

a. From the problem description. Make sure that you change the units to
millimeters. The thickness of the first element should be of the same order as
the roughness height.
b. This value would typically come from experimental or reference data.

3.

Apply the same setting values for Sand One Way Coupled as for Sand Fully Coupled.

4.

Click OK.

11.4.5.5. Editing the Default Boundary

1.

In the Outline tree view, edit the boundary named Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid
Values

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully Coupled

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.9

Boundary Conditions

Sand One Way Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.9

a. This value would typically come from experimental or reference data. For this
tutorial, the pipe wall and butterfly valve are considered to be made of different
materials, so their perpendicular coefficients are different.

212

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

11.4.6. Setting Initial Values

Set up the initial values to be consistent with the inlet boundary conditions:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>W

3.

Wprof

Click OK.

11.4.7. Setting the Solver Controls

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

213

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Particle
Control

Setting

Value

> Option

High
Resolution

Particle Integration
> Max. Particle Intg. Time Step

(Selected)

Particle Integration
> Max. Particle Intg. Time Step
> Value

1e+10 [s]

Particle Termination Control

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Time

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Time
> Value

10 [s]

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Distance

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Distance
> Value

10 [m]

Particle Termination Control

> Max. Num. Integration Steps

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Max. Num. Integration Steps
> Value

10000

[a]

a. This value controls the number of mesh elements a particle is allowed to cross
and therefore must take into account the size and density of the mesh.

Note
The numeric values in the preceding table are all designed to put a high upper limit on
the amount of processing that will be done. For example, the tracking time of 10 seconds
would enable a particle to get caught in an eddy for a reasonable amount of time.

3.

214

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

11.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

PipeValve.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by using the procedure that follows.
1.

Ensure the Define Run dialog box is displayed and click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will first plot erosion on the valve surface and side walls due to the sand particles.
You will then create an animation of particle tracks through the domain.

11.6.1. Erosion Due to Sand Particles

An important consideration in this simulation is erosion to the pipe wall and valve due to the sand
particles. A good indication of erosion is given by the Erosion Rate Density parameter, which
corresponds to pressure and shear stress due to the flow.
1.

Edit the object named Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) using the Ellipsis

as required for variable selection:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand One Way Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

215

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

Max

25 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

[b]

a. This is statistically better than Sand Fully Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density because many more particles were calculated for Sand One Way
Coupled.
b. This range is used to gain a better resolution of the wall shear stress values
around the edge of the valve surfaces.

3.

Click Apply.
As can be seen, the highest values occur on the edges of the valve where most particles strike.
Erosion of the low Z side of the valve would occur more quickly than for the high Z side.

11.6.2. Displaying Erosion on the Pipe Wall

Set the user specified range for coloring to resolve areas of stress on the pipe wall near of the valve:
1.

Ensure that the check box next to Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled is cleared.

2.

Clear the check box next to Default Domain Default.

3.

Edit the object named pipe wall.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand One Way Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

Max

25 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Optionally, fill the check box next to Default Domain Default to see how sand particles have deflected off the butterfly valve then to the pipe wall.

11.6.3. Creating Particle Tracks

Default particle track objects are created at the start of the session. One particle track is created for
each set of particles in the simulation. You are going to make use of the default object for Sand Fully
Coupled.

216

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The default object draws 25 tracks as lines from the inlet to outlet. The Info tab shows information
about the total number of tracks, the index range, and the track numbers that are drawn.
1.

Turn off the visibility for all objects except Wireframe.

2.

Edit the object named Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Max Tracks

20

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand Fully Coupled.Velocity w

Show Symbols

(Selected)

Symbol

[a]

Show Symbols
> Max Time

0 [s]

Show Symbols
> Min Time

0 [s]

Show Symbols
> Interval

0.07 [s]

Show Symbols
> Symbol

Ball

Show Symbols
> Scale

1.2

a. This value improves the resolution of the tracks generated.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu and
select View From +X to view the particle tracks.
Symbols can be seen at the start of each track.

11.6.4. Creating a Particle Track Animation

The following steps describe how to create a particle tracking animation using Quick Animation. Similar effects can be achieved in more detail using the Keyframe Animation option, which allows full
control over all aspects on an animation.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) from the
shortcut menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

217

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

2.

Right-click an edge of the flat side on the half cylinder and select Reflect/Mirror from the shortcut menu.
Click X Axis to choose it as the normal direction.

Note
Alternatively, you can apply Reflect/Mirror, by double-clicking Default Domain to
open the details view. In the Instancing tab enable Apply Reflection and select
Method to YZ Plane. Click Apply.

3.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

4.

Select Quick Animation.

5.

Select Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled:

6.

Click Options to display the Animation Options dialog box, then clear Override Symbol Settings to
ensure the symbol type and size are kept at their specified settings for the animation playback. Click OK.

Note
The arrow pointing downward in the bottom right corner of the Animation Window will
reveal the Options button if it is not immediately visible.

7.

Select Loop.

8.

Clear Repeat forever

9.

Select Save Movie.

and ensure Repeat is set to 1.

10. Set Format to MPEG1.

11. Click Browse

and enter tracks.mpg as the filename.

12. Click Play the animation

13. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie, click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an .mpg file.
14. Close the Animation dialog box.

11.6.5. Determining Minimum, Maximum, and Average Pressure Values

On the outlet boundary you created in CFX-Pre, you set the Average Static Pressure to 0.0 [Pa].
To see the effect of this:
1.

218

From the main menu select Tools > Function Calculator.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The Function Calculator is displayed. It enables you to perform a wide range of quantitative calculations on your results.

Note
You should use Conservative variable values when performing calculations and Hybrid
values for visualization purposes. Conservative values are set by default in CFD-Post but
you can manually change the setting for each variable in the Variables Workspace, or
the settings for all variables by using the Function Calculator.

2.

Set Function to maxVal.

3.

Set Location to outlet.

4.

Set Variable to Pressure.

5.

Click Calculate.
The result is the maximum value of pressure at the outlet.

6.

Perform the calculation again using minVal to obtain the minimum pressure at the outlet.

7.

Select areaAve, and then click Calculate.

This calculates the area weighted average of pressure.
The average pressure is approximately zero, as specified by the boundary.

11.6.6. Other Features

The geometry was created using a symmetry plane. In addition to the Reflect/Mirror option from the
shortcut menu, you also can display the other half of the geometry by creating a YZ Plane at X = 0 and
then editing the Default Transform object to use this plane as a reflection plane.
When you have finished viewing the results, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

219

220

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 12: Flow in a Catalytic Converter

This tutorial includes:
12.1.Tutorial Features
12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
12.3. Preparing the Working Directory
12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using multiple meshes in CFX-Pre.
Joining meshes together using static fluid-fluid domain interfaces between the inlet/outlet flanges and the
central catalyst body.
Applying a source of resistance using a directional loss model.
Creating a chart to show pressure drop versus Z coordinate in CFD-Post.
Exporting data from a line locator to a file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
(Fluid, Porous)

Fluid Type

Ideal Gas

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip

CFD-Post

Domain Interfaces

Fluid-Porous

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Contour
Default Locators
Outline Plot
(Wireframe)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

221

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Component

Feature

Details
Polyline
Slice Plane
Vector

Other

Chart Creation
Data Export
Title/Text
Viewing the Mesh

12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Catalytic converters are used on most vehicles on the road today. They reduce harmful emissions from
internal combustion engines (such as oxides of nitrogen, hydrocarbons, and carbon monoxide) that are
the result of incomplete combustion. Most new catalytic converters are the honeycomb ceramic type
and are usually coated with platinum, rhodium, or palladium.

In this tutorial, you will model a catalytic converter in order to determine the pressure drop and heat
transfer through it when air enters the inlet at 25 m/s and 500 K, and exits the outlet at a static pressure
of 1 atm. For simplicity, you will not model chemical reactions.
You are provided with a mesh for the passageways inside a pipe-and-flange structure. You will use this
mesh, and a copy of it, to model the pipe and flange portions of the flow field, at both ends of the
catalytic converter.
For the housing, you are provided with a hexahedral mesh that was created in ICEM-Hexa. This mesh
fills the entire 3D volume of the housing.
To model the presence of the honeycomb structure that exists in the housing, you will model porosity
and apply resistance to the flow. The honeycomb structure has a porosity of 70%, which means that

222

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

70% of the total volume is available for fluid flow, while the other 30% is occupied by the solid material
that comprises the honeycomb structure. The solid component of the structure will be steel. The honeycomb structure is lined up with the flow to prevent flow travel in the transverse direction. To model
resistance to the flow, you will apply a streamwise quadratic resistance coefficient of 650 kg m^-4. To
reduce the amount of transverse flow, apply a quadratic resistance coefficient of 6500 kg m^-4 in the
transverse direction. These given resistance coefficients are based on the superficial flow velocity, rather
than the true flow velocity.
The Inlet boundary has a static temperature of 500 K. You will model heat transfer through the solid
material in the porous domain. The heat transfer between the air and steel within the porous domain
is modeled using an interfacial area density of 360 m^-1 and a heat transfer coefficient of 50 W m^-2
K^-1. Thermal energy is lost to the environment through the midsection walls of the catalytic converter;
the rate of heat loss is defined by the heat transfer coefficient (20 W m^-2 K^-1) and the outside temperature (40 C).
You will first import the mesh for the housing. You will then import a mesh for one of the two flanges.
You will then produce another flange mesh by transforming the first. You will create one porous domain
for the housing, and one fluid domain for both flanges. You will model a honeycomb structure inside
the housing by specifying a porosity and applying a directional momentum loss model.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

12.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
CatConvHousing.hex
CatConvMesh.gtm
CatConv.ccl
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CatConv.pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

223

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).
b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 235).

This tutorial requires that you are working with SI units. In particular, some coordinates used in the
specification of a mesh transformation (performed later in this tutorial) are given without units, and
CFX-Pre assumes that the working units apply. Before continuing, ensure that your units are set to SI
as follows:
1.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2.

In the tree on the left side of the dialog box, select Common > Units.

3.

Set System to SI.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Select File > New Case.

6.

Select General and click OK.

7.

Select File > Save Case As.

8.

Under File name, type CatConv.

9.

Click Save.

12.4.1. Importing the Meshes and CCL File

The mesh for this catalytic converter comprises three distinct parts:
The outlet section (pipe and flange).
The inlet section (pipe and flange).
You will copy and rotate the outlet section through 180 degrees to create this section.
The catalyst (or monolith).
You will import a CFX Command Language (CCL) file defining mathematical expressions for this case.
Next you will import the catalyst housing and a generic inlet/outlet section from provided files.

12.4.1.1. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File

The CCL file you are going to import contains expressions that will be used to define parameters in the
simulation. These can be seen in the table below:
Expression

Value

AreaDen

360 [m^-1]

HTC

50 [W m^-2 K^-1]

HTCoutside

20 [W m^-2 K^-1]

224

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Expression

Value

0.4 [m]

Porosity

0.7

Tinlet

500[K]

Toutside

40 [C]

Import the CCL File to define relevant expressions:

1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

2.

Select CatConv.ccl

3.

Click Open.

4.

Expand the Expressions section in the Outline tree to see a list of the expressions that have been
imported.

12.4.1.2. Importing the Housing Mesh

The first mesh that you will import, CatConvHousing.hex, is a hexahedral mesh for the catalyst
housing. The mesh was originally created in ICEM-Hexa using mesh units of centimeters. Because this
type of mesh file does not specify the mesh units, you must specify them manually. The imported mesh
has a width in the X direction of 21 cm and a length in the Z direction of 20 cm.
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

All Types(*)

Mesh Format

ICEM CFD

File name

CatConvHousing.hex

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

cm

Click Open.

Later in this tutorial, you will create a porous domain for the housing in order to simulate flow through
a honeycomb structure.

12.4.1.3. Importing the Pipe and Flange Mesh

The second mesh that you will import, CatConvMesh.gtm, is a mesh for a pipe and flange. The mesh
has units of centimeters. Because this type of mesh file does specify the mesh units, there is no need
to specify them manually.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

225

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CatConvMesh.gtm

Click Open.

You now have a pipe and flange on the outlet end of the housing. In the next step, you will create a
transformed copy of the pipe and flange for the inlet end.

12.4.1.4. Creating a Second Pipe and Flange Mesh

Create a transformed copy of the pipe and flange mesh:
1.

Right-click CatConvMesh.gtm and select Transform Mesh.

The Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transformation

Rotation

Rotation Option

Rotation Axis

From

0, 0, 0.16

To

0, 1, 0.16

Rotation Angle Option

Specified

Rotation Angle

180 [degree]

Multiple Copies

(Selected)

Multiple Copies > # of

Copies

[a]

a. This specifies an axis located at the center of the housing parallel

to the Y axis.

3.

Click Apply.

Later in this tutorial, you will create a fluid domain for both pipe and flange sections.

12.4.1.5. Creating a Single Region for Both Pipe and Flange Meshes
The outlet pipe and flange region is B1.P3. The inlet pipe and flange region is B1.P3 2.
There are three basic options for creating fluid domains on these regions:
Create two similar domains: one that applies to B1.P3, and one that applies to B1.P3 2.

226

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Create one domain that applies to both B1.P3 and B1.P3 2.
Create one domain that applies to one composite region, the latter referring to B1.P3 and B1.P3 2.
For demonstration purposes, you will create a composite region and use it as the location for a single
fluid domain.
Create a single region that includes both pipe-flange regions:
1.

Create a new composite region by selecting Insert > Regions > Composite Region.

2.

In the Insert Region dialog box, set the name to CatConverter.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

3D

Region List

B1.P3, B1.P3 2

Click OK.

12.4.2. Creating the Fluid Domain

For this simulation you will use a thermal energy heat transfer model and assume turbulent flow. Create
the fluid domain using the composite region that you created earlier:
1.

Create a new domain by selecting Insert > Domain, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to Pipes.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

CatConverter

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

227

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Setting

Value

> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

5.

Thermal Energy

Click OK.

12.4.3. Creating the Porous Domain

The catalyst-coated honeycomb structure will be modeled using a porous domain with a directional
source of quadratic resistance, as described in the problem description. The streamwise directional
resistance is aligned with the Z axis.
For quadratic resistances, the pressure drop is modeled using:
(12.1)

where

is the quadratic resistance coefficient,

is the local velocity in the direction, and

pressure drop gradient in the direction.

1.

Create a new domain by selecting Insert > Domain, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to Housing.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

LIVE

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Porous
Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1

228

> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Solid Definitions

(Add a new
solid named
Steel)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

is the

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Solid Definitions
> Steel
> Material

Steel

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

Heat Transfer
> Option

Solid
Models

Thermal
Energy

Heat Transfer
> Option

Porosity
Settings

1 [atm]

Thermal
Energy

Volume Porosity
> Option

Value

Volume Porosity
> Volume Porosity

Porosity

[d]

Loss Model
> Option

Directional
Loss

Loss Model
> Loss Velocity Type

Superficial
[b]

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> X Component

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

229

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Setting

Value

> Streamwise Direction

> Y Component

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> Z Component

-1

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss > Option

Linear and
Quadratic
Coeffs.

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss
> Quadratic Resistance Coefficient

(Selected)

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss
> Quadratic Resistance Coefficient
> Quadratic Coefficient

650 [kg
m^-4]

[c]

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Transverse Loss
> Option

Streamwise
Coeff.
Multiplier

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Transverse Loss
> Multiplier

10

[c]

Fluid Solid Area Density

230

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Interfacial Area Den.

AreaDen

[d]

Fluid Solid Heat Transfer

> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTC

[d]

a. This is the entire housing section as predefined in the mesh.

b. Superficial velocity is the velocity at which the flow would travel if the porosity
of the domain were 100%. It is less than the true velocity.
c. From the problem description.
d. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

5.

Click OK.

12.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundaries

Create the inlet and outlet boundaries using the values given in the problem description.

12.4.4.1. Creating the Inlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary in domain Pipes named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

PipeEnd 2

Boundary

Mass and Momentum

Details

[a]

> Normal Speed

25 [m s^-1]

[b]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

Tinlet

a. The default level of turbulence is suitable for this application.

b. From the problem description.

3.

Click OK.

12.4.4.2. Creating the Outlet Boundary

Set up the outlet with a static pressure boundary:
1.

Create a new boundary in domain Pipes named Outlet.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

231

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

PipeEnd

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.
The remaining outer surfaces are automatically assigned to the default (no slip wall) boundaries:
Housing Default and Pipes Default.

12.4.4.3. Editing the Housing Default Boundary

In order to model the heat transfer through the Housing domain, several parameters from the
Housing Default boundary need to be modified.
1.

In the Outline tree, right-click Housing Default and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Value

Heat Transfer
Coefficient

Heat Transfer
> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTCoutside

Heat Transfer
> Outside Temperature
Solid Values

Toutside

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Heat Transfer
Coefficient

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer

232

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTCoutside

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer
> Outside Temperature

3.

Toutside

Click OK.

12.4.5. Creating the Domain Interfaces

You will next create a pair of domain interfaces to model the connection between the fluid and porous
domains. The meshes on the interfaces are dissimilar, so a General Grid Interface (GGI) connection
method is required. Domain interfaces are capable of modeling changes in reference frame as well as
other changes that are not applicable to this simulation.
Two interfaces are required, one to connect the inlet flange to the catalyst housing and one to connect
the outlet flange to the catalyst housing.
1.

Create a new domain interface by selecting Insert > Domain Interface, or click Domain Interface

2.

In the Insert Domain Interface dialog box, set the name to InletSide.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Porous

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

Pipes

Interface Side 1
> Region List

FlangeEnd 2

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

Housing

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Mesh
Connection

INLET

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

GGI

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

233

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

5.

Click OK.

6.

Create a similar domain interface named OutletSide that connects FlangeEnd (in domain Pipes)
to OUTLET (in domain Housing).

12.4.6. Setting Initial Values

A sensible guess for the initial velocity is the expected velocity through the catalyst housing. You can
assume incompressible flow and apply conservation of mass to obtain an approximate velocity of
2.8 [m s^-1] through the housing based on the following known information:
The inlet velocity: 25 [m s^-1]
The cross-sectional area of the inlet and housing, which can be determined using the function calculator in
CFD-Post: 0.001913 m^2 and 0.024039 m^2 respectively
The porosity of the honeycomb structure: 70%
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
> Option

Automatic with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W

3.

234

-2.8 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

12.4.7. Setting Solver Control

Assuming velocities of 25 m/s in the inlet and outlet pipes, and 2.8 m/s in the catalyst housing, an approximate fluid residence time of 0.1 s can be calculated. A sensible time step is 1/4 to 1/2 of the fluid
residence time. In this case, use a time step of 0.04 s.
For the convergence criteria, an RMS value of at least 1e-05 is usually required for adequate convergence,
but the default value of 1e-04 is sufficient for demonstration purposes.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

3.

0.04 [s]

Click OK.

12.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CatConv.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

235

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will inspect the GGI interface to see the lack of node alignment that characterizes
this type of interface. You will also create plots showing the distribution of temperature and pressure
on a flat plane that intersects the catalytic converter. You will then make a chart showing pressure
versus Z coordinate using data from a polyline that runs around the perimeter of the catalytic converter.
Finally, you will export data from the polyline to a file. Such a file could be used in other programs, or
could be loaded into CFD-Post (for example, to use as data for a chart line).
The topics in this section include:
12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface
12.6.2. Creating User Locations
12.6.3. Creating Plots
12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data

12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface

In this section, you will examine a GGI interface. As a preliminary step, do the following:
1.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that both domains are selected,
then click OK.

2.

Edit User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

3.

Set Edge Angle to 10 [degree] and click Apply to see more of the mesh surface.

4.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

5.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

In the Outline tree view, four interface sides are listed. There are two sides to the interface between
the housing and the inlet. Similarly, there are two sides to the corresponding interface on the outlet
side.
Examine the interface on the inlet side to see the nature of the GGI connection:
1.

In the Outline tree view, edit InletSide Side 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

236

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Outline tree view, edit InletSide Side 2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

(Red)

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Fit View

(Green)

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

You can now see the tetrahedral/prism and hexahedral mesh on each side of the GGI interface. This
interface was used to produce a connection between dissimilar meshes before the solution was calculated.
Notice that there are more tetrahedral/prism elements than hexahedral elements and that the extent
of the two meshes is not quite the same (this is most noticeable on the curved edges).

12.6.2. Creating User Locations

In this section, you will create locators that you will use to make plots.
To make it easier to see the locators, adjust the view as follows:
1.

Turn on the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Pipes > InletSide Side 1 and Housing > InletSide Side 2.

12.6.2.1. Creating a Slice Plane

Later in this tutorial, you will produce a contour plot and a vector plot to observe pressure changes.
Both of these plots require a slice plane locator.
Create a slice plane through the geometry as follows:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

237

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

> Method

ZX Plane

Definition

Color

>Y

0.0 [m]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Steel.Temperature[a]

Range

Global

a. If particular items do not appear in the drop-down list, click the Ellipsis icon
available items.

to see all

4.

Click Apply. Notice the temperature distribution in the steel throughout the catalytic converter housing.

5.

To see the temperature distribution in the fluid, change Variable to Temperature and click Apply.

6.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Plane 1 after you have analyzed the air
temperature variation on Plane 1.

12.6.2.2. Creating a User Surface

You will create a user surface to observe the different characteristics of steel and air at the catalytic
converter wall. Because the materials have different properties, the characteristics of each will vary
slightly.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y Up).

2.

Click Location

3.

Click OK to accept the default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Transformed Surface

Surface Name

Housing Default

Mode

Variable

Variable

Steel.Temperature

Range

Local

Color

5.
238

and select User Surface.

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Observe that the steel temperature decreases as it reaches the outlet pipe.
6.

Configure the following setting(s) to show the air temperature at the wall:
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Temperature

Range

Local

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Configure the following setting(s) to show the steel heat flux at the wall:

9.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Steel.Wall Heat Flux

Range

Local

Click Apply.
The values of the heat flux are negative because heat flow is directed away from the catalyst
housing. The magnitude of heat flux should be greatest where the inlet pipe meets the housing
body.

10. Configure the following setting(s) to show the air heat flux at the wall:
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Wall Heat Flux

Range

Local

11. Click Apply.

The values of the heat flux are negative because heat flow is directed away from the catalyst converter. The magnitude of heat flux should be greatest where the inlet pipe meets the housing
body.
12. Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > User Surface 1.

12.6.2.3. Creating a Polyline

Later in this tutorial, you will make a chart that plots data from a polyline.
The Method used to create the polyline can be From File, Boundary Intersection, or From
Contour. If you select From File, you must specify a file containing point definitions in the required
format.
In this tutorial, you will use the Boundary Intersection method. This creates a polyline from the
intersecting line between a boundary object and a location (for example, between a wall and a plane).
The points on the polyline are where the intersecting line cuts through a surface mesh edge.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

239

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

You will be able to see the polyline following the intersecting line between the wall, inlet and outlet
boundaries and the slice plane.
1.

Create a new polyline named Polyline 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Boundary Intersection

Boundary List

Housing Default, Pipes

Default

Color
Render

[a]

Intersect With

Plane 1

Mode

Constant

Color

(Yellow)

Line Width

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to select multiple items using the Ctrl key.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Polyline 1.

12.6.3. Creating Plots

In this section, you will make plots on the slice plane and polyline locators.

12.6.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot of Pressure

You will now create a contour plot to observe the pressure change throughout the main body of the
catalytic converter:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.

2.

Clear Plane 1 in the Outline tab if you have not already done so.

3.

Create a new contour plot named Contour 1.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Pressure

Range

Global

# of Contours

30

Show Contour Bands

(Cleared)

Render

5.

240

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

From the contour plot, you can see that the pressure falls steadily through the main body of the
catalytic converter.

12.6.3.2. Creating a Vector Plot on the Slice Plane

Create a vector plot to display the recirculation zone:
1.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Symbol

Symbol Size

0.1

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Notice that the flow separates from the walls, where the inlet pipe expands into the flange, setting up
a recirculation zone. The flow is uniform through the catalyst housing.

12.6.3.3. Creating a Chart of Pressure versus the Z Coordinate

In this section, you will make a chart to see if the pressure drop is, as expected, linear by plotting a line
graph of pressure against the z-coordinate. In this case you will use CFD-Post to produce the graph,
but you could also export the data, then read it into any standard plotting package.
1.

Create a new chart named Chart 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Pressure Drop through a

Catalytic Converter

Data
Series

Name

Pressure Drop

Data Source
> Location

X Axis

Data Selection
> Variable

Y Axis

Line
Display

Polyline 1

Data Selection
> Variable

Pressure

Pressure Drop

(Selected)

[a]

Line Display
> Line Style [b]

None

Line Display
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

241

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Chart
Display

Setting

Value

> Symbols [b]

Rectangle

Sizes
> Symbol

a. Click the Pressure Drop entry in the Specify the properties of each line
list to select it.
b. These options will only be revealed if you have successfully selected Pressure
Drop.

3.

Click Apply.
Through the main body of the catalytic converter you can see that the pressure drop is linear. This
is in the region from approximately Z=0.06 to Z=0.26. The two lines show the pressure on each
side of the wall. You can see a noticeable difference in pressure between the two walls on the inlet
side of the housing (at around Z=0.26).

4.

If required, in the Outline tree view, select Contour 1 and Vector 1.

5.

Click the 3D Viewer tab, then right-click a blank area and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.
You should now see that the flow enters the housing from the inlet pipe at a slight angle, producing
a higher pressure on the high X wall of the housing.

12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data

You can export data from a polyline for use in other software.
Export data as follows:
1.

From the main menu, select File > Export > Export.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Options

Locations

Polyline 1

Export Geometry Information

(Selected)

Select Variables

Pressure

Precision

Formatting

[a]

a. This ensures X, Y, and Z to be sent to the output file.

3.

Click Save.
The file export.csv will be written to the current working directory in a comma-separated variable
format. This file can be opened in any text editor. You can use the exported data file to plot charts
in other software such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

242

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

When finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

243

244

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 13: Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

This tutorial includes:
13.1.Tutorial Features
13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
13.3. Background Theory
13.4. Preparing the Working Directory
13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

13.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Defining a non-Newtonian fluid.
Using the Moving Wall feature to apply a rotation to the fluid at a wall boundary.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Laminar

Heat Transfer

None

Boundary Conditions

Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Moving

CFD-Post

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Plots

Sampling Plane
Vector

13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, a shear-thickening liquid rotates in a 2D eccentric annular pipe gap. The outer pipe remains
stationary while the inner pipe rotates at a constant rate about its own axis, which is the Z axis. Both
pipes have nonslip surfaces.
The fluid used in this simulation has material properties that are not a function of temperature. The
ambient pressure is 1 atmosphere.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

245

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

The shear-thickening liquid that is used in this tutorial obeys the Ostwald de Waele model with a viscosity consistency of 10.0 kg m-1 s-1, a Power Law index of 1.5, and a time constant of 1 s. This model
is assumed to be valid for shear-strain rates ranging from 1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The fluid has a density
of 1.0E4 kg m-3. The viscosity is plotted over this range in Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shearthickening Fluid (p. 247).

13.3. Background Theory

A Newtonian fluid is a fluid for which shear stress is linearly proportional to shear-strain rate, with
temperature held constant. For such a fluid, the dynamic viscosity is constant and equal to the shear
stress divided by the shear-strain rate.
A non-Newtonian fluid is a fluid for which the shear stress in not linearly proportional to the shear-strain
rate. For such fluids, the apparent viscosity is the ratio of shear stress to shear-strain rate for a given
shear-strain rate.
A shear-thickening fluid is a type of non-Newtonian fluid for which the apparent viscosity increases
with increasing shear-strain rate.

246

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

Figure 13.1: Shear Stress of a Shear-thickening Fluid

Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shear-thickening Fluid

This tutorial involves a shear thickening fluid that obeys the Ostwald de Waele model between apparent
viscosity and shear-strain rate:
(13.1)
where is the apparent viscosity, is the viscosity consistency, is the shear-strain rate, is a normalizing time constant, and is the Power Law index. Note that the units for are not tied to the value
of because the quantity in parentheses is dimensionless.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

13.4. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

247

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

NonNewtonMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run NonNewton.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 254).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type NonNewton.

6.

Click Save.

13.5.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

NonNewtonMesh.gtm

Click Open.

13.5.2. Creating the Fluid

As stated in the problem description, the shear-thickening liquid that is used in this tutorial obeys the
Ostwald de Waele model with a viscosity consistency ( ) of 10.0 kg m-1 s-1, a Power Law index ( ) of

248

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.5, and a time constant of 1 s. This model is assumed to be valid for shear-strain rates ranging from
1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The fluid has a density of 1.0E4 kg m-3.
1.

Create a new material named myfluid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

Liquid

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

1.0 [kg
kmol^-1]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1.0E+4 [kg
m^-3]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Non
Newtonian
Model

a. While this is not the correct molar mass, it is not a value used by CFX-Solver in
this particular case.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) under Transport Properties > Dynamic Viscosity > Non Newtonian
Viscosity Model:
Setting

Value

Option

Ostwald de Waele

Viscosity Consistency

10.0 [kg m^-1 s^1]

Min. Shear Strn. Rate

0.001 [s^-1]

Max. Shear Strn. Rate

100 [s^-1]

Time Constant

1 [s]

Power Law Index

1.5

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

249

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

Click OK.

13.5.3. Creating the Domain

The flow is expected to be laminar because the Reynolds number, based on the rotational speed, the
maximum width of the pipe gap, and a representative viscosity (calculated using the shear-strain rate
in the widest part of the gap, assuming a linear velocity profile), is approximately 30, which is well
within the laminar-flow range.
From the problem description, the ambient pressure is 1 atmosphere.
Create a fluid domain that uses the non-Newtonian fluid you created in the previous section, and specify
laminar flow with a reference pressure of 1 atmosphere:
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to NonNewton.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of NonNewton:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

B8

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material
Fluid
Models

myfluid

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence
> Option

3.

None (Laminar)

Click OK.

13.5.4. Creating the Boundaries

The inner and outer pipes both have nonslip surfaces. A rotating-wall boundary is required for the inner
pipe. For the outer pipe, which is stationary, the default boundary is suitable. By not explicitly creating
a boundary for the outer pipe, the latter receives the default wall boundary.
This tutorial models 2D flow in a pipe gap, where the latter is infinite in the Z direction. The flow domain
models a thin 3D slice (in fact, just one layer of mesh elements) that has two surfaces of constant-Z
coordinate that each require a boundary. Symmetry boundary conditions are suitable in this case, since
there is no pressure gradient or velocity gradient in the Z direction.

13.5.4.1. Wall Boundary for the Inner Pipe

From the problem description, the inner pipe rotates at 31.33 rpm about the Z axis. Create a wall
boundary for the inner pipe that indicates this rotation:

250

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Create a new boundary named rotwall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

rotwall

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Option

Rotating Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Angular Velocity

31.33 [rev min^-1]

Mass And Momentum

> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Mass And Momentum

> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

3.

Global Z

Click OK.

13.5.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary

In order to simulate the presence of an infinite number of identical 2D slices while ensuring that the
flow remains 2D, apply a symmetry boundary on the high-Z and low-Z sides of the domain:
1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP1

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

251

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP2

Click OK.
The outer annulus surfaces will default to the no-slip stationary wall boundary.

13.5.5. Setting Initial Values

A reasonable guess for the initial velocity field is a value of zero throughout the domain. In this case,
the problem converges adequately and quickly with such an initial guess. If this were not the case, you
could, in principle, create and use CEL expressions to specify a better approximation of the steady-state
flow field based on the information given in the problem description.
Set a static initial velocity field:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Global Initial Conditions

Settings
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

3.

252

0 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

13.5.6. Setting Solver Control

Because this flow is low-speed, laminar, and because of the nature of the geometry, the solution converges very well. For this reason, set the solver control settings for a high degree of accuracy and a
high degree of convergence.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Specified Blend
Factor

Advection Scheme
> Blend Factor

1.0

[a]

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1e-05

[b]

a. This is the most accurate but least robust advection scheme.

b. This target demands a solution with a very high degree of convergence.

3.

Click OK.

13.5.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

NonNewton.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

253

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by following the instructions below:
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following steps instruct you on how to create a vector plot showing the velocity values in the domain.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z from the shortcut
menu.

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

This plane will be used as a locator for a vector plot. To produce regularly-spaced sample points,
create a circular sample plane, centered on the inner pipe, with a radius sufficient to cover the
entire domain, and specify a reasonable number of sample points in the radial and theta directions.
Note that the sample points are generated over the entire plane, and only those that are in the
domain are usable in a vector plot.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Point and Normal

Definition
> Point

0, 0, 0.015

[a]

Definition
> Normal

0, 0, 1

Plane Bounds
> Type

Circular

Plane Bounds
> Radius
254

0.3 [m]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Plane Type

Sample

Plane Type
> R Samples

32

Plane Type

Render

> Theta Samples

24

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Line Color

(Choose green, or
some other color,
to distinguish the
sample plane from
the Wireframe
object.)

a. This is the point on the axis of the inner pipe, in the middle of the domain in the
Z direction.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Examine the sample plane. The sample points are located at the line intersections. Note that many of the
sample points are outside the domain. Only those points that are in the domain are usable for positioning
vectors in a vector plot.

6.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1.

7.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1 on Plane 1.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition
> Sampling

Vertex

[a]

Definition
> Reduction

Reduction Factor

Definition
> Factor

1.0

[b]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

255

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition
> Variable

Velocity

Definition

Symbol

> Boundary Data

Hybrid

Symbol Size

[c]

[d]

a. This causes the vectors to be located at the nodes of the sample plane you
created previously. Note that the vectors can alternatively be spaced using other
options that do not require a sample plane.
b. A reduction factor of 1.0 causes no reduction in the number of vectors so that
there will be one vector per sample point.
c. The hybrid values are modified at the boundaries for postprocessing purposes.
d. Because CFD-Post normalizes the size of the vectors based on the largest vector,
and because of the large variation of velocity in this case, the smallest velocity
vectors would normally be too small to see clearly.

9.

Click Apply.

In CFX-Pre, you created a shear-thickening liquid that obeys the Ostwald de Waele model for shearstrain rates ranging from 1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The values of dynamic viscosity, which are a function of
the shear-strain rate, were calculated as part of the solution. You can post-process the solution using
these values, which are stored in the Dynamic Viscosity variable. For example, you can use this
variable to color graphics objects.
Color Plane 1 using the Dynamic Viscosity variable:
1.

Turn on the visibility of Plane 1.

2.

Edit Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Dynamic Viscosity

Show Faces

(Selected)

Render

4.

Click Apply

Try plotting Shear Strain Rate on the same plane. Note that the distribution is somewhat different
than that of Dynamic Viscosity, as a consequence of the nonlinear relationship (see Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shear-thickening Fluid (p. 247)).
When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.
256

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 14: Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

This tutorial includes:
14.1.Tutorial Features
14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
14.3. Preparing the Working Directory
14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model
14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

14.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using the Turbo Wizard in CFX-Pre to quickly specify a turbomachinery application.
Multiple Frames of Reference and Generalized Grid Interface.
Using a Frozen Rotor interface between the rotor and stator domains.
Modifying an existing simulation.
Setting up a transient calculation.
Using a Transient Rotor-Stator interface condition to replace a Frozen Rotor interface.
Creating a transient animation showing domain movement in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard

Analysis Type

Steady State
Transient

Fluid Type

Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Domain Interfaces

Frozen Rotor
Periodic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

257

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Component

Feature

Details
Transient Rotor Stator

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Transient Example

Transient Results File

CFX-Solver
Manager

Restart

CFD-Post

Plots

Parallel Processing
Animation
Isosurface
Surface Group
Turbo Post
Other

Changing the Color

Range
Chart Creation
Instancing
Transformation
Movie Generation
Quantitative Calculation
Time Step Selection
Transient Animation

14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient calculation of an axial turbine stage.
The stage contains 60 stator blades and 113 rotor blades. The following figure shows approximately
half of the full geometry. The Inflow and Outflow labels show the location of the modeled section in
Figure 14.1: Geometry subsection (p. 260).

258

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single stator blade passage and two rotor blade passages.
This is an approximation to the full geometry since the ratio of rotor blades to stator blades is close to,
but not exactly, 2:1. In the stator blade passage a 6 section is being modeled (360/60 blades), while
in the rotor blade passage, a 6.372 section is being modeled (2*360/113 blades). This produces a pitch
ratio at the interface between the stator and rotor of 0.942. As the flow crosses the interface, it is scaled
to enable this type of geometry to be modeled. This results in an approximation of the inflow to the
rotor passage. Furthermore, the flow across the interface will not appear continuous due to the scaling
applied.
You should always try to obtain a pitch ratio as close to 1 as possible in your model to minimize approximations, but this must be weighed against computational resources. A full machine analysis can be
performed (modeling all rotor and stator blades), which always eliminates any pitch change, but will
require significant computational time. For this geometry, a 1/4 machine section (28 rotor blades, 15
stator blades) would produce a pitch change of 1.009, but this would require a model about 15 times
larger than in this tutorial example.
In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 523.6 rad/s while the stator and shroud are stationary. The tip gap between the rotor blades and the shroud is not included in the mesh. Periodic
boundaries are used to enable only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled.
The important parameters of this problem are:
Total pressure = 0.265 bar

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

259

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Static Pressure = 0.0662 bar
Total temperature = 328.5 K
Figure 14.1: Geometry subsection

The overall approach of this tutorial is to run a transient simulation using the Transient Rotor-Stator
interface model initialized with the results of a steady-state simulation that uses the Frozen Rotor interface
model. First, you will define a steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation using the Turbomachinery Wizard.
The results of this simulation will be viewed using the Turbo-Post feature. Next, you will rerun the
steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation using an Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate boundary condition. You
will modify a copy of this steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation to define the transient simulation with
the Transient Rotor-Stator interface model. After running the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation, you will
create an animation showing domain movement.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

14.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

260

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
rotor.grd
stator.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model
You will first create the Frozen Rotor simulation.

14.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The Turbomachinery wizard is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run AxialIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 266).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type AxialIni.

6.

Click Save.

14.4.1.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Analysis Type
> Type

2.

Steady State

Click Next.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

261

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.4.1.2. Component Definition

Two new components are required. As they are created, meshes are imported.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary, named S1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

stator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

523.6 [radian s^-1]

Mesh
> File

rotor.grd

[a]

Options
> Mesh Units

a. You may have to select the CFX-TASCflow (*grd) option under Files of
Type.

Note
The components must be ordered as above (stator then rotor) in order for the interface
to be created correctly. The order of the two components can be changed by rightclicking on S1 and selecting Move Component Up.
When a component is defined, Turbo Mode will automatically select a list of regions that correspond
to certain boundary types. This information should be reviewed in the Region Information section
to ensure that all is correct. This information will be used to help set up boundary conditions and
interfaces. The upper case turbo regions that are selected (for example, HUB) correspond to the
region names in the CFX-TASCflow grd file. CFX-TASCflow turbomachinery meshes use these names
consistently.
6.

262

Click Passages and Alignment > Edit.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Passage and Alignment

> Passages/Mesh
> Passages per Mesh

Passage and Alignment

> Passages to Model

Passage and Alignment

> Passages in 360

8.

Click Passages and Alignment > Done.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

113

Setting

Value

Wall Configuration

(Selected)

Wall Configuration
> Tip Clearance at Shroud

Yes

[a]

No

[a]

Wall Configuration
> Tip Clearance at Hub

a. These settings configure the slip conditions on the walls such that the shroud
is counter-rotating with respect to the rotor, but the hub is not.

10. Click Next.

14.4.1.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0.25 [atm]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

263

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Setting

Value

> Turbulence

k-Epsilon

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> P-Total Inlet Mass Flow Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> P-Total

0 [atm]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> T-Total

340 [K]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to
Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Outflow
> Mass Flow

Per Component

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Outflow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.06 [kg s^-1]

Interface
> Default Type

Frozen Rotor

Solver Parameters

(Selected)

Solver Parameters
> Advection Scheme

High Resolution

Solver Parameters
> Convergence Control

Physical
Timescale

Solver Parameters
> Physical Timescale
a. This time scale is approximately equal to 1 /
rotating machinery applications.

2.
264

0.002 [s]

[a]

, which is often appropriate for

Click Next.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

14.4.1.4. Interface Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate interfaces using the region names presented previously in the
Region Information section. In this case, you should see that a periodic interface has been generated
for both the rotor and the stator. These are required when modeling a small section of the true geometry.
An interface is also required to connect the two components together across the frame change.
1.

Review the various interfaces but do not change them.

2.

Click Next.

14.4.1.5. Boundary Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate boundary conditions using the region names presented previously
in the Region Information section. In this case, you should see a list of boundary conditions that have
been generated. They can be edited or deleted in the same way as the interface connections that were
set up earlier.
1.

Review the various boundary definitions but do not change them.

2.

Click Next.

14.4.1.6. Final Operations

1.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.
After you click Finish, a dialog box appears stating that the Turbo report will not be included in
the solver file because you are entering General mode.

3.

Click Yes to continue.

14.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

AxialIni.def

[a]

a. You do not need to set the full path unless you are saving the solver file
somewhere other than the working directory.

3.

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

265

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Compared to previous tutorials, the mesh for this tutorial contains many more nodes (although it is still
too coarse to perform a high quality CFD simulation). This results in a corresponding increase in solution
time for the problem. Solving this problem in parallel is recommended, if possible. Your machine should
have a minimum of 256 MB of memory to run this tutorial.
More detailed information about setting up CFX to run in parallel is available. For details, see Flow
Around a Blunt Body (p. 127).
You can solve this example using Serial, Local Parallel or Distributed Parallel.
Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 266)
Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel (p. 266)
Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel (p. 267)

14.4.2.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial

If you do not have a license to run CFX in parallel you can run in serial by clicking the Start Run button
when CFX-Solver Manager has opened up. Solution time in serial is approximately 45 minutes on a 1
GHz processor.
1.

Click Start Run on the Define Run dialog box.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

2.

Select Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

When you are finished, proceed to Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 267).

14.4.2.2. Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel

To run in local parallel mode:
1.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Local
Parallel.

2.

If required, click Add Partition

to add more partitions.

By default, two partitions are assigned. Ideally, the number of partitions should not exceed the
number of available processor cores.
3.

Click Start Run.

4.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

266

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

When you are finished, proceed to Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 267).

14.4.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel

1.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Dis
tributed Parallel.
One partition should already be assigned to the host that you are logged into.

2.

Click Insert Host

to specify a new parallel host.

3.

In Select Parallel Hosts, select another host name (this should be a machine that you can log into using
the same user name).

4.

Click Add, and then Close.

The names of the two selected machines should be listed in the Host Name column of the Define
Run dialog box.

5.

Click Start Run.

6.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

7.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

8.

Click OK.

14.4.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that both the
R1 and S1 domains are selected, then click OK to load the results from these domains.
The Turbo-Post feature will be demonstrated in the following sections. This feature is designed to greatly
reduce the effort taken to post-process turbomachinery simulations.

14.4.2.4.1. Initializing Turbo-Post

When initializing turbo components, span, a (axial), r (radial), and Theta coordinates are generated for
each component. Therefore, after entering the Turbo workspace and initializing the turbo components,
you will be ready to start using the turbo-specific features offered in the Turbo workspace immediately.
These features include Turbo Tree View, Turbo Surface, Turbo Line and Turbo Plots.
To initialize Turbo-Post, the properties of each component must be set up. This includes information
about the inlet, outlet, hub, shroud, blade, and periodic regions. It also includes information about the
number of instances of each turbo component needed to represent the full geometry around the rotation
axis, and the number of blade passages in the mesh for each turbo component.
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

267

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed, and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize
all components.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

2.

Click Yes.
In this case, the initialization works without problems. If there was a problem initializing a component, this would likely be indicated in the tree view.

14.4.2.4.2. Viewing Three Domain Passages

Next, you will create an instancing transformation to plot three domain passages; three blade passages
for the stator and six blade passages for the rotor. It was chosen to create three times the geometry
that was used in the simulation to help visualize the variation of pressure. Seeing neighboring passages
will give a better understanding of the pressure variation through the stage.
The instancing properties of each domain have already been entered during Initialization. In the next
steps, you will create a surface group plot to color the blade and hub surfaces with the same variable.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Surface Group.

2.

Click OK to accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

R1 Blade, R1 Hub, S1 Blade, S1

Hub

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Turbo tab.

6.

Open Plots > 3D View for editing.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

R1

Graphical Instancing

268

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

Tab

Setting

Value

> # of Copies

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

S1

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

10. Click Apply.

11. Click the Outline tab to see the surface group.

14.4.2.4.3. Blade Loading Turbo Chart

In this section, you will create a plot of pressure around the stator blade at a given spanwise location.
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

2.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Blade Loading.

3.

Click Apply.
This profile of the pressure curve is typical for turbomachinery applications.

4.

When you are finished viewing the chart, return to the Outline tab and keep CFD-Post open.

14.4.3. Simulating the Stage with the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate Boundary
Condition
You will now use a different outlet boundary condition, namely the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate
specification for the R1 Outlet boundary, that will enable you to specify the mass flow at the outlet
at corrected conditions. The Reference Pressure and Reference Temperature will be set to International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA) conditions (1 atm and 288.15 K).
The exit corrected mass flow is defined as:
(14.1)

where,
and
at the outlet.

are mass averaged values of total pressure and temperature in the stationary frame

The intent of this section is to obtain the same operating point with the exit corrected mass flow
boundary condition as with the previous setup that used the mass flow boundary condition at the
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

269

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

outlet. To do this you need to calculate, from the previous cases results, the mass averaged values of
total pressure and temperature at the outlet, in the stationary frame. These values along with the mass
flow (0.06 kg s^-1) and the reference values mentioned above are substituted into Equation 14.1 (p. 269).
The resulting value for the exit corrected mass flow is 0.3745 kg s^-1. You may want to verify this by
doing the calculation yourself.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

AxialIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already open.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run AxialIni_Cor.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 271).

4.

Open the results file named AxialIni_001.res.

5.

Save the case as AxialIni_Cor.cfx in your working directory.

6.

In the tree view, open R1 Outlet for editing.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Value

Exit Corrected Mass

Flow Rate

Mass And Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

0.3745 [kg s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

> Ref. Temperature

288.15 [K]

Mass And Momentum

> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

[a]

a. The Ref. Temperature and Reference Pressure values should be the default
settings but if they are not, ensure that they are the values given in the table.

8.
270

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

14.4.3.1. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Follow one of the next two procedures as appropriate:

Procedure 1: If Simulation Control > Execution Control does not appear in the outline tree view:
1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

AxialIni_Cor.def

Click Save.

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
Procedure 2: If Simulation Control > Execution Control appears in the outline tree view:
1.

Click Execution Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run
Definition

Solver Input File

AxialIni_Cor.def

3.

Click OK.

4.

Click Define Run

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
2.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

14.4.3.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

As in the previous setup of the steady-state simulation for this case, solving the problem in parallel is
recommended, if possible.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select Run Mode > Platform MPI Local Parallel and click Start Run.

3.

In CFX-Solver Manager, select Workspace > New Monitor in the main menu and click OK to accept the
default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

271

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Tab

Setting

Plot Lines

Flow

Value

> Boundary
> R1 Outlet
> P-Mass Boundary Flow on
R1 Outlet (R1)

(Selected)

5.

Click OK.

6.

When the dialog box is displayed stating that the simulation has ended, click OK.

Note
The resulting plot of the P-Mass Boundary Flow on R1 Outlet (R1) vs. Accumulated Time
Step converges to 0.06 on the Y axis. The exit corrected mass flow rate entered (0.3745
kg s^-1) for this run yields the same physical mass flow as used in the previous steadystate setup; this is expected. The value is negative because the flow is leaving the domain.

If you would like to convince yourself that the results are identical, you can proceed to the following
section and do a case comparison in CFD-Post. If you do not want to compare the cases, proceed to
Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model (p. 274).

14.4.4. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post

In this section you will compare the domain passages of the two cases.
1.

With AxialIni_001.res already loaded in CFD-Post, select File > Load Results.

2.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Keep current cases loaded, then select the file AxialIni_Cor_001.res. Click Open. If the Domain Selector dialog box appears, ensure that both the R1
and S1 domains are selected, and then click OK.

3.

You should see the two cases beside one another in the 3D Viewer. Click the synchronize active view icon
.

4.

Right-click within the 3D view and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) to orient the views.
Click Fit View

5.

to scale the blades appropriately within the 3D Viewer.

Next, you will create an instancing transformation to plot three domain passages; three blade passages
for the stator and six blade passages for the rotor, as you did for the previous case.
The instancing properties of each domain have already been entered during Initialization. In the
next steps, you will create a surface group plot to color the blade and hub surfaces with the same
variable.

6.

272

Select Insert > Location > Surface Group from the main menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

7.

Click OK to accept the default name.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Locations
> AxialIni_Cor_001

Value

R1 Blade, R1 Hub, S1 Blade, S1

Hub

Color

a. Click the

9.

[a]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

button beside the drop-down box to see all available items.

Click Apply.

10. Click the Turbo tab.

11. Open Plots > 3D View for editing.
12. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

R1 (AxialIni_Cor_001)

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

13. Click Apply.

Note
If the image from the results of AxialIni_Cor_001 is not displayed in the 3D Viewer,
select it from the drop-down list at the top of the viewer.

14. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

S1 (AxialIni_Cor_001)

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

273

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

15. Click Apply.
16. Click the Outline tab to see the surface group.
17. To see both images, click the viewport icon and select
. You may need to turn on the visibility of
Surface Group 1 in the tree view to compare the two surfaces.
After you have finished your comparison, close CFD-Post.

14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

You will now create the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation. The existing steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation is modified to define the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation. If you have not already completed
the Frozen Rotor simulation, refer to Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model (p. 261) before proceeding with the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation.

14.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre.
This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following file is in your working directory:

AxialIni_001.res

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Axial.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6). The session file creates a new simulation named
Axial.cfx.

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 277).

4.

Open the results file named AxialIni_001.res.

5.

Save the case as Axial.cfx in your working directory.

14.5.1.1. Modifying the Physics Definition

You need to modify the domain to define a transient simulation. You are going to run for a time interval
such that the rotor blades pass through 1 pitch (6.372) using 10 time steps. This is generally too few

274

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

time steps to obtain high quality results, but is sufficient for tutorial purposes. The time step size is
calculated as follows:

Note

Since 10 time steps are used over this interval each time step should be 2.124e-5 s.
1.

Select Tools > Turbo Mode.

Basic Settings is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Type

Transient

Analysis Type
> Total Time

2.124e-4 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps

2.124e-5 [s]

[a]

a. This time step size will be used until the total time is reached, giving 10 time
steps, each 2.124e-5 s.

3.

Click Next.
Component Definition is displayed.

4.

Click Next.
Physics Definition is displayed.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Interface

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

275

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Setting

Value

> Default Type

Transient Rotor Stator

Note
A Transient Rotor-Stator calculation often runs long enough for the blades to pass
through more than one pitch. In these cases, it may be useful to look at variable data
averaged over the time interval required to complete 1 pitch. You can then compare
data for each pitch rotation to see if a steady state has been achieved, or if the flow
is still developing.

6.

Click Next.
A warning message is displayed.

7.

Click Yes.
Interface Definition is displayed.

8.

Click Next.
Boundary Definition is displayed.

9.

Click Next.
Final Operations is displayed.

10. Ensure that Operation is set to Enter General Mode.

11. Click Finish.
Initial values are required, but will be supplied later using a results file.

14.5.1.2. Setting Output Control

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, Velocity in Stn Frame

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

276

Time Interval
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

Setting

Value

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

2.124e-5 [s]

a. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one variable.

5.

Click OK.

14.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control

1.

Click Execution Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run
Definition

Solver Input File

Axial.def

[a]

a. You do not need to set the full path unless you are saving the solver file
somewhere other than the working directory.

3.

Confirm that the rest of the execution control settings are set appropriately.

4.

Click OK.

14.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

A warning will appear, due to a lack of initial values.

Initial values are required, but will be supplied later using a results file.
2.

Click Yes.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

14.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When the CFX-Solver Manager has started you will need to specify an initial values file before starting
the CFX-Solver.

14.5.2.1. Serial Solution

If you do not have a license, or do not want to run CFX in parallel, you can run it in serial. Solution time
in serial is similar to the first part of this tutorial.
1.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

277

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

2.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

3.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

4.

Select AxialIni_001.res from your working directory.

5.

Click Open.

6.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

7.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

8.

Select Post-Process Results.

9.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

10. Click OK. Continue this tutorial from Monitoring the Run (p. 278).

14.5.2.2. Parallel Solution

Follow the first 6 steps of the serial procedure above (in Serial Solution (p. 277)), then perform the local
parallel or distributed parallel procedure from the first part of this tutorial (in Obtaining the Solution
Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 266)).

14.5.2.3. Monitoring the Run

During the solution, look for the additional information that is provided for Transient Rotor-Stator runs.
Each time the rotor is rotated to its next position, the number of degrees of rotation and the fraction
of a pitch moved is given. You should see that after 10 time steps the rotor has been moved through
1 pitch.

14.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

To examine the transient interaction between the rotor and stator, you are going to create a blade-toblade animation of pressure. A turbo surface will be used as the basis for this plot.

14.5.3.1. Initializing Turbo-Post

All the preprocessing will be done during the initialization of the turbo components. Only a few steps
will therefore be required to display a surface of constant span and to create a turbo surface later on
in this tutorial.
1.

278

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize
all components.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

2.

Click Yes.
Both components (domains) are now being initialized based on the automatically selected turbo
regions. When the process is complete, a green turbine icon appears next to each component entry
in the list. Also, the viewer displays a green background mesh for each initialized component.

3.

Double-click Component 1 (S1) and review the automatically-selected turbo regions and other data
in the details view.

4.

Double-click Component 2 (R1) and review the automatically-selected turbo regions and other data
in the details view (including the Passages per Component setting on the Instancing tab, which should
have a value of 2).

14.5.3.2. Displaying a Surface of Constant Span

1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Blade-to-Blade.

2.

Click Apply.
A surface of constant span appears, colored by pressure.

14.5.3.3. Using Multiple Turbo Viewports

1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Initialization.

2.

Click Three Views.

Left view is 3D View, top right is Blade-to-Blade and bottom right is Meridional view.

3.

Click Single View.

14.5.3.4. Creating a Turbo Surface at Mid-Span

1.

Create a Turbo Surface by selecting Insert > Location > Turbo Surface from the drop-down menu with
a Constant Span and value of 0.5.

2.

Under the Color tab select Variable and set it to Pressure with a user specified range of -10000 [Pa] to
-7000 [Pa].

3.

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

279

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.5.3.5. Setting up Instancing Transformations

Next, you will use instancing transformations to view a larger section of the model. The properties for
each domain have already been entered during the initialization phase, so only the number of instances
must be set.
1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click the 3D View object.

2.

In the Instancing section of the form, set # of Copies to 6 for R1.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Instancing section of the form, set # of Copies to 6 for S1.

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Return to the Outline tab and ensure that the turbo surface is visible again.

14.5.3.6. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator

Start by loading the first time step:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Select time value 0.

3.

Click Apply to load the time step. The rotor blades move to their starting positions. These positions are
exactly 1 pitch from the blade positions that were previously displayed, so the blades will appear to be
in the same positions.

4.

Turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

5.

Position the geometry as shown below, ready for the animation. During the animation the rotor blades
will move to the right. Make sure you have at least two rotor blades out of view to the left side of the
viewer. They will come into view during the animation.

280

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

6.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

7.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

8.

Click New

9.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 9, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyFrameNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

10. Use the Timestep Selector to load the final time step.
11. In the Animation dialog box, click New
12. Click More Animation Options

to create KeyframeNo2.

to expand the Animation dialog box.

13. Click Options and set Transient Case to TimeValue Interpolation. Click OK.
The animation now contains a total of 11 frames (9 intermediate frames plus the two Keyframes),
one for each of the available time values.
14. In the expanded Animation dialog box, select Save Movie.
15. Set Format to MPEG1.
16. Click Browse

, next to the Save Movie box and then set the file name to an appropriate file name.

17. If frame 1 is not loaded (shown in the F: text box at the bottom of the Animation dialog box), click
To Beginning

to load it.

Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
18. Click Play the animation

It takes a while for the animation to be completed.

To view the movie file, you will need to use a media player that supports the MPEG format.
You will be able to see from the animation, and from the plots created previously, that the flow is
not continuous across the interface. This is because a pitch change occurs. The relatively coarse
mesh and the small number of time steps used in the transient simulation also contribute to this.
The movie was created with a narrow pressure range compared to the global range, which exaggerates the differences across the interface.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

281

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.5.3.7. Further Postprocessing

You can produce a report for the turbine as follows:
1.

Click File > Report > Report Templates.

2.

In the Report Templates dialog box, select Turbine Report, then click Load.
The report will be generated automatically.

3.

Click the Report Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).
A report appears.

Note that a valid report depends on valid turbo initialization.

282

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 15: Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

This tutorial includes:
15.1.Tutorial Features
15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
15.3. Preparing the Working Directory
15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

15.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Creating and using a multicomponent fluid in CFX-Pre.
Using CEL to model a reaction in CFX-Pre.
Using an algebraic Additional Variable to model a scalar distribution.
Using a subdomain as the basis for component sources.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Variable Composition
Mixture

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Particle Tracking

Component Source

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: Adiabatic

Additional Variables
CEL (CFX Expression
Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Isosurface
Slice Plane

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

283

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Reaction engineering is one of the core components in the chemical industry. Optimizing reactor design
leads to higher yields, lower costs and, as a result, higher profit.
This example demonstrates the capability of ANSYS CFX to model basic reacting flows using a multicomponent fluid and CEL expressions.

The geometry consists of a mixing tube with three rings with twelve holes in each ring.
The main inlet has water entering at 2 m/s with a temperature of 300 K. The pressure at the outlet is
1 atm.
Through the ring of holes nearest the inlet, a solution of dilute sulfuric acid enters at 2 m/s with a
temperature of 300 K. Through each of the two other rings of holes, a solution of dilute sodium hydroxide
enters at 2.923 m/s with a temperature of 300 K. The properties of the solution of sulfuric acid are
shown in Table 15.1: Properties of the Dilute Sulfuric Acid Solution (p. 284):
Table 15.1: Properties of the Dilute Sulfuric Acid Solution
Property

Value

Molar mass

19.517 kg kmol^-1

Density

1078 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

284

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

Through the remaining two rings of holes, a solution of dilute sodium hydroxide (an alkali) enters with
a temperature of 300 K. The properties of the solution of sodium hydroxide are shown in
Table 15.2: Properties of the Dilute Sodium Hydroxide Solution (p. 285).
Table 15.2: Properties of the Dilute Sodium Hydroxide Solution
Property

Value

Molar mass

18.292 kg kmol^-1

Density

1029 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

The acid and alkali undergo an exothermic reaction to form a solution of sodium sulfate (a type of salt)
and water according to the reaction:

Mixing the acid and alkali solutions in a stoichiometric ratio (and enabling them to react completely)
would result in a salt water solution that would include water from each of the original solutions plus
water produced during the reaction. The properties of this salt water product are shown in
Table 15.3: Properties of the Salt Water Product (p. 285).
Table 15.3: Properties of the Salt Water Product
Property

Value

Molar mass

18.600 kg kmol^-1

Density

1031 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

The heat of reaction is 460 kJ per kg of dilute acid solution.

The flow is assumed to be fully turbulent and turbulence is assumed to have a significant effect on the
reaction rate.
After running the simulation, you will plot the distribution of pH in the tube, and determine the extent
to which the pH is neutralized at the outlet. You will also plot mass fraction distributions of acid, alkali
and product.
In order to reduce memory requirements and solution time, only a 30 slice of the geometry will be
modeled, and symmetry boundary conditions will be applied to represent the remaining geometry.
The reaction between acid and alkali is represented as a single-step irreversible liquid-phase reaction:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

285

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Reagent (dilute sulfuric acid) is injected through a ring of holes near the start of the tube. As it flows
along the tube it reacts with Reagent (dilute sodium hydroxide), which is injected through a further
two rings of holes downstream. The product, , remains in solution.
You will create a variable-composition mixture that contains water, the reactants, and the product. To
model the reaction, you will use CEL expressions to govern the mass sources for the acid, alkali and
product components. You will also use CEL expressions to govern the thermal energy source. Providing
mass and energy sources over a volume requires a subdomain. Because the reaction may occur anywhere
in the domain, you will create a subdomain that occupies the entire flow domain.

Note
You can also model this type of reaction using a reacting mixture as your fluid. For details,
see Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor (p. 413).
To model the pH, you will create an algebraic Additional Variable that is governed by a CEL expression
for pH. The Additional Variable will be available in the solution results for analysis during postprocessing.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

15.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
ReactorExpressions.ccl
ReactorMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Reactor.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
286

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 311).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type Reactor.

6.

Click Save.

15.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

ReactorMesh.gtm

Click Open.

15.4.2. Creating a Multicomponent Fluid

In addition to providing template fluids, CFX allows you to create custom fluids for use in all your CFX
models. A custom fluid may be defined as a pure substance, but may also be defined as a mixture,
consisting of a number of transported fluid components. This type of fluid model is useful for applications
involving mixtures, reactions, and combustion.
In order to define custom fluids, CFX-Pre provides the Material details view. This tool allows you to
define your own fluids as pure substances, fixed composition mixtures or variable composition mixtures
using a range of template property sets defined for common materials.
The mixing tube application requires a fluid made up from four separate materials (or components).
The components are the reactants and products of a simple chemical reaction together with a neutral
carrier liquid. You are first going to define the materials that take part in the reaction (acid, alkali and
product) as pure substances. The neutral carrier liquid is water, and is already defined. Finally, you will
create a variable composition mixture consisting of these four materials. This is the fluid that you will
use in your simulation. A variable composition mixture (as opposed to a fixed composition mixture) is
required because the proportion of each component will change throughout the simulation due to the
reaction.

15.4.2.1. Acid Properties

The properties of the dilute sulfuric acid solution were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named acid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

287

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

19.517 [kg
kmol^-1]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1078 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties

288

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Dynamic Viscosity

> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

a. The Molar Masses for the three materials do not affect the solution except
through the post-processed variables Molar Concentration and Molar Fraction.

3.

Click OK.

15.4.2.2. Alkali Properties

The properties of the dilute sodium hydroxide solution were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named alkali.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

289

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Molar Mass

18.292 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1029 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

290

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

15.4.2.3. Reaction Product Properties

The properties of the salt water product were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named product.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

18.600 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1031 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

291

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

3.

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

Click OK.

15.4.2.4. Fluid Properties

Define a variable composition mixture by combining water with the three materials you have defined:
acid, alkali, product.
1.

Create a new material named mixture.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Variable Composition
Mixture

Material Group

User, Water Data

Materials List

Water, acid, alkali,

product

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State

292

Liquid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

15.4.3. Creating an Additional Variable to Model pH

You are going to use an Additional Variable to model the distribution of pH in the mixing tube. You
can create Additional Variables and use them in selected fluids in your domain.
1.

Create a new Additional Variable named MixturePH.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Variable Type

Specific

Units

[]

Tensor Type

Scalar

Click OK.

This Additional Variable is now available for use when you create or modify a domain. You will set
other properties of the Additional Variable, including how it is calculated, when you apply it to the
domain later in this tutorial.

15.4.4. Formulating the Reaction and pH as Expressions

This section includes:
Stoichiometric Ratio (p. 293)
Reaction Source Terms (p. 295)
Calculating pH (p. 297)
Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH (p. 298)
The first section shows a derivation for the mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid
solution. This ratio is used for calculating various quantities throughout this tutorial.
The second subsection (Reaction Source Terms (p. 295)) shows you how reactions and reaction kinetics
can be formulated using the Eddy Break Up (EBU) model.
The third subsection (Calculating pH (p. 297)), shows you how pH is calculated.
In the fourth subsection (Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH (p. 298)) you will use
a provided file to load CEL expressions for the reaction source terms and the pH.

15.4.4.1. Stoichiometric Ratio

The mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution is a quantity that is used in several
calculations in this tutorial. It represents the mass ratio of alkali solution to acid solution which leads
to complete reaction with no excess alkali or acid (that is, neutral pH). This section of the tutorial shows
you how to calculate the stoichiometric ratio, and introduces other quantities that are used in this tutorial.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

293

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

The alkali solution contains water and sodium hydroxide. In the alkali solution, it is assumed that the
sodium hydroxide molecules completely dissociate into ions according to the following reaction:

The acid solution contains water and sulfuric acid. In the acid solution, it is assumed that the sulfuric
acid molecules completely dissociate into ions according to the following reaction:

The
ions and
reaction:

ions react to form sodium sulfate (a type of salt) and water according to the

Note that this reaction requires the ions from two molecules of sodium hydroxide and the ions from
one molecule of sulfuric acid. The stoichiometric ratio for the dry alkali and acid molecules is 2-to-1.
Instead of modeling dry molecules of alkali and acid, this tutorial models solutions that contain these
molecules (in dissociated form) plus water. The calculations used to model the alkali-acid reactions, and
to measure the pH, require a mass-based stoichiometric ratio, , that expresses the mass ratio between
the alkali solution and the acid solution required for complete reaction of all of the (dissociated) alkali
and acid molecules within them.
Using
to denote
two masses:

and

to denote

, the ratio can be computed as the ratio of the following

The mass of alkali solution required to contain 2 kmol of

The mass of acid solution required to contain 1 kmol of
A formula for calculating is:
(15.1)

where:

is the concentration of

is the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution).
in kmol/kg solution).

The molar mass of the alkali solution (given as 18.292 kg/kmol solution) is a weighted average of the
molar masses of water (18.015 kg/kmol) and dry sodium hydroxide (39.9971 kg/kmol), with the
weighting in proportion to the number of each type of molecule in the solution. You can compute the
fraction of the molecules in the solution that are sodium hydroxide as:

294

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

can then be calculated as follows:

The molar mass of the acid solution (given as 19.517 kg/kmol solution) is a weighted average of the
molar masses of water (18.015 kg/kmol) and dry sulfuric acid (98.07848 kg/kmol), with the weighting
in proportion to the number of each type of molecule in the solution. You can compute the fraction of
the molecules in the solution that are sulfuric acid as:

can then be calculated as follows:

Substituting the values for and

of alkali solution to acid solution:

into Equation 15.1 (p. 294) yields the mass-based stoichiometric ratio
.

15.4.4.2. Reaction Source Terms

The reaction and reaction rate are modeled using a basic Eddy Break Up formulation for the component
and energy sources. For example, the transport equation for the mass fraction of acid solution is:
(15.2)

where

is time,

is velocity,

is the local density of the variable composition mixture,

is the

mass fraction of the acid solution in the mixture,

is the kinematic diffusivity of the acid solution
through the mixture, and is the stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution based on mass
fraction. The right-hand side represents the mass source term that is applied to the transport equation
for the acid solution. The left-hand side consists of the transient, advection and diffusion terms.
In addition to specifying the sources for the acid solution and alkali solution, source coefficients will
also be used in order to enhance solution convergence. For details, see the technical note at the end
of this section.
The reaction rate is computed as:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

295

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

where is the turbulence kinetic energy, and is the turbulence eddy dissipation. Note that the reaction
rate appears on the right-hand side of Equation 15.2 (p. 295). The reaction rate is also used to govern
the rate of thermal energy production according to the relation:

From the problem description, the heat of reaction is 460 kJ per kg of acid solution.

Note
This is a technical note, for reference only.
A source is fully specified by an expression for its value .
A source coefficient is optional, but can be specified to provide convergence enhancement
or stability for strongly-varying sources. The value of may affect the rate of convergence
but should not affect the converged results.
If no suitable value is available for , the solution time scale or time step can still be reduced
to help improve convergence of difficult source terms.

Important
must never be positive.
An optimal value for when solving an individual equation for a positive variable
source whose strength decreases with increasing is

with a

Where this derivative cannot be computed easily,

may be sufficient to ensure convergence. (This is the form used for the acid solution and alkali
solution mass source coefficients in this tutorial.)
Another useful formula for

is

where is a local estimate for the source time scale. Provided that the source time scale is
not excessively short compared to flow or mixing time scales, this may be a useful approach
for controlling sources with positive feedback (
) or sources that do not depend
directly on the solved variable .

296

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

15.4.4.3. Calculating pH
The pH (or acidity) of the mixture is a function of the volume-based concentration of
ions. The latter
can be computed using the following two equations, which are based on charge conservation and
equilibrium conditions, respectively:

(where

is the constant for the self-ionization of water (1.0E-14 kmol2 m-6)).

You can substitute one equation into the other to obtain the following quadratic equation:

which can be rearranged into standard quadratic form as:

The quadratic equation can be solved for

and

using the equation

where

The volume-based concentrations of

and
are required to calculate , and can be calculated from
the mass fractions of the components using the following expressions:

where:

is the concentration of
is the concentration of

in kmol/m^3.
in kmol/m^3.

is the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

is the concentration of

is the local density of the variable composition mixture.

is the mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution.

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

Note that the second expression above can be re-written by substituting for
The result is:

in kmol/kg solution).
in kmol/kg solution).

using Equation 15.1 (p. 294).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

297

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

After solving for the concentration of

ions, the pH can be computed as:

In order to set a limit on pH for calculation purposes, the following relation will be used in this tutorial:

15.4.4.4. Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH

Load the expressions required to model the reaction sources and pH:
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

2.

Ensure that Import Method is set to Append.

3.

Select ReactorExpressions.ccl, which should be in your working directory.

4.

Click Open.

Observe the expressions listed in the tree view of CFX-Pre. Some expressions are used to support other
expressions. The main expressions are:
Expression
Name

Description

Supporting
Expressions

pH

The pH of the mixture.

Hions, a, b, c, Yions,
Xions, alpha, i

HeatSource

The thermal energy released

from the reaction.

HeatReaction, Rate

AcidSource

The rate of production of

acid due to the reaction
(always negative or zero).

Rate

AcidSourceCoeff

The source coefficient for

AcidSource (to enhance
convergence).

AcidSource

AlkaliSource

The rate of production of

alkali due to the reaction
(always negative or zero).

Rate

AlkaliSourceCoeff

The source coefficient for

AlkaliSource (to enhance
convergence).

AlkaliSource

ProductSource

The rate of production of salt

water product (always
positive or zero).

Rate

298

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Note that the expressions do not refer to a particular fluid since there is only a single fluid (which
happens to be a multicomponent fluid). In a multiphase simulation you must prefix variables with a
fluid name, for example Mixture.acid.mf instead of acid.mf.

15.4.5. Creating the Domain

In this section, you will create a fluid domain that contains the variable composition mixture and the
Additional Variable that you created earlier. The Additional Variable will be set up as an algebraic
equation with values calculated from the CEL expression for pH.
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on.
A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

2.

Edit Default Domain.

3.

Under the Fluid and Particle Definitions setting, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid definition
called Mixture.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

B1.P3

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Mixture

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Mixture
> Material

mixture

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal Energy

Component Models
> Component

acid

Component Models
> Component
> acid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

299

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Transport
Equation

Component Models
> Component
> acid
> Kinematic Diffusivity

(Selected)

Component Models
> Component
> acid
> Kinematic Diffusivity
> Kinematic Diffusivity

0.001 [m^2
s^-1]

5.

Use the same Option and Kinematic Diffusivity settings for alkali and product as you have just set
for acid.

6.

For Water, set Option to Constraint as follows:

Tab

Setting

Fluid
Models

Component Models

Value

> Component

Water

Component Models
> Component
> Water
> Option

Constraint

One component must always use Constraint. This is the component used to balance the mass
fraction equation; the sum of the mass fractions of all components of a fluid must equal unity.
7.

Configure the following setting(s) to apply the Additional Variable that you created earlier:
Tab

Setting

Fluid
Models

Additional Variable Models

Value

> Additional Variable

> MixturePH

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

300

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Additional Variable

> MixturePH
> Option

Algebraic Equation

[a]

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> MixturePH
> Add. Var. Value

pH

a. The other possible options either involve a transport equation to transport the
Additional Variable in the flow field, or a Vector Algebraic Equation, which is for
vector quantities. The Algebraic Equation is suitable because it allows the
calculation of pH as a function of existing variables and expressions.

8.

Click OK.

15.4.6. Creating a Subdomain to Model the Chemical Reactions

To provide the correct modeling for the chemical reaction you need to define mass fraction sources for
the fluid components acid, alkali, and product. To do this, you need to create a subdomain where
the relevant sources can be specified. In this case, sources need to be provided within the entire domain
of the mixing tube since the reaction occurs throughout the domain.
1.

Ensure that you have loaded the CEL expressions from the provided file.
The expressions should be listed in the tree view.

2.

Create a new subdomain named sources.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

B1.P3

Sources

Sources

(Selected)

[a]

Sources
> Equation Sources

acid.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

301

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> acid.mf
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source

AcidSource

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

AcidSourceCoeff

Sources
> Equation Sources

alkali.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Source

AlkaliSource

Sources
> Equation Sources

302

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> alkali.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

AlkaliSourceCoeff

Sources
> Equation Sources

Energy

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source

HeatSource

Sources
> Equation Sources

product.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Option

Source

Sources

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

303

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Equation Sources

> product.mf
> Source

ProductSource

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

0 [kg m^-3
s^-1]

a. This is the 3D region that fills the domain.

4.

Click OK.

15.4.7. Creating the Boundary Conditions

Add boundary conditions for all boundaries except the mixing tube wall; the latter will receive the default
wall condition. Many of the required settings were given in the problem description. Since the fluid in
the domain is a multicomponent fluid, you can control which component enters at each inlet by setting
mass fractions appropriately. Note that water is the constraint material; its mass fraction is computed
as unity minus the sum of the mass fractions of the other components.

15.4.7.1. Water Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the water inlet using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InWater.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InWater

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

304

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

3.

Leave mass fractions for all components set to zero. Since Water is the constraint fluid, it will be automatically given a mass fraction of 1 on this inlet.

4.

Click OK.

15.4.7.2. Acid Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the acid solution inlet hole using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InAcid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InAcid

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details

acid

Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

1.0

Component Details

alkali

Component Details
> alkali

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

305

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Mass Fraction

Component Details

product

Component Details
> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.7.3. Alkali Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the alkali solution inlet holes using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InAlkali.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InAlkali

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

2.923 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details
> acid

(Selected)

Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

Component Details
> alkali

(Selected)

Component Details

306

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> alkali
> Mass Fraction

Component Details
> product

(Selected)

Component Details
> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.7.4. Outlet Boundary

Create a subsonic outlet at 1 atm (which is the reference pressure that was set in the domain definition):
1.

Create a new boundary named out.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

out

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

15.4.7.5. Symmetry Boundary

The geometry models a 30 slice of the full geometry. Create two symmetry boundaries, one for each
side of the geometry, so that the simulation models the entire geometry.
1.

Create a new boundary named sym1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

sym1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

307

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named sym2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

sym2

Click OK.

Note that, in this case, a periodic interface can be used as an alternative to the symmetry boundary
conditions.

15.4.7.6. Default Wall Boundary

The default adiabatic wall boundary applies automatically to the remaining unspecified boundary, which
is the mixer wall. The default boundary is a smooth, no-slip, adiabatic wall.

15.4.8. Setting Initial Values

The values for acid, alkali, and product will be initialized to 0. Since Water is the constrained
component, it will make up the remaining mass fraction which, in this case, is 1.
Since the inlet velocity is 2 m/s, a reasonable guess for the initial velocity is 2 m/s.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Global Initial Conditions

Settings
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

2 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components

308

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

acid

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> acid
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

alkali

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> alkali
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> alkali
> Mass Fraction

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

product

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> product
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

309

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.9. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.01 [s]

[a]

a. The length of mixing tube is 0.06 m and inlet velocity is 2 m/s. An estimate of
the dynamic timescale is 0.03 s. An appropriate time step would be between 1/4
and 1/2 of this estimate.

3.

Click OK.

15.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

310

Setting

Value

File name

Reactor.def

Click Save.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD problem as follows:
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Select Double Precision.

This provides the precision required to evaluate the expression for pH.

3.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

4.

Select Post-Process Results.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

To see the nature and extent of the reaction process, examine the pH, the mass fractions, and turbulence
quantities on a plane as follows:
1.

Create an XY slice plane through Z = 0.

2.

Turn off the visibility of the plane you just created.

3.

Create contour plots of the following variables on that plane:

MixturePH
acid.Mass Fraction
alkali.Mass Fraction
product.Mass Fraction
Turbulence Kinetic Energy
Turbulence Eddy Dissipation

4.

Create an expression for Turbulence Eddy Dissipation/Turbulence Kinetic Energy,

then create a variable using the expression (only variables can be plotted) and create a contour plot using
that variable. This quantity is an indicator of the reaction rate it represents 1 / mixing timescale.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

311

312

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 16: Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

This tutorial includes:
16.1.Tutorial Features
16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
16.3. Preparing the Working Directory
16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager
16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS

16.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Creating and using a solid domain as a heating coil in CFX-Pre.
Creating a domain interface.
Modeling conjugate heat transfer in CFX-Pre.
Using electricity to power a heat source.
Plotting temperature on a cylindrical locator in CFD-Post.
Lighting in CFD-Post.
Exporting thermal and mechanical data to be used with ANSYS Multi-field solver.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Multiple Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon
Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Heat Transfer Modeling

Conjugate Heat
Transfer (via Electrical
Resistance Heating)

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Opening
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

313

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Component

Feature

Details

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Contour
Cylindrical Locator
Isosurface
Temperature Profile
Chart

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Expression Details View
Lighting Adjustment
Variable Details View
Exporting Results to
ANSYS

16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates the capability of ANSYS CFX to model conjugate heat transfer. In this tutorial,
a heat exchanger is used to model the transfer of thermal energy from an electrically-heated solid
copper coil to the water flowing around it.
There is a fluid domain for the water and a solid domain for the coil. The fluid domain is an annular
region that envelops the coil, and has water at an initial temperature of 300 K flowing through it at 0.4
m/s. The copper coil has a 4.4 V difference in electric potential from one end to the other end and is
given an initial temperature of 550 K. Assume that the copper has a uniform electrical conductivity of
59.6E+06 S/m and that there is a 1 mm thick calcium carbonate deposit on the heating coil.
The material parameters for the calcium carbonate deposit are:
Molar Mass = 100.087[kg kmol^-1]
Density = 2.71[g cm^-3]
Specific Heat Capacity = 0.9[J g^-1 K^-1]
Thermal Conductivity = 3.85[W m^-1 K^-1]

314

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This tutorial also includes an optional step that demonstrates the use of the CFX to ANSYS Data Transfer
tool to export thermal and mechanical stress data for use with ANSYS Multi-field solver. A results file is
provided in case you want to skip the model creation and solution steps within ANSYS CFX.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

16.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

HeatingCoilMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

In this tutorial, you will create a solid copper coil with a 1 mm thick calcium carbonate deposit.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run HeatingCoil.pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

315

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).
b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 324).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type HeatingCoil.

6.

If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

7.

Click Save.

16.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

HeatingCoilMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

16.4.2. Editing the Material Properties

1.

Expand Materials in the tree view, right-click Copper and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Copper:

Tab

Setting

Value

Material
Properties

Electromagnetic Properties

Expand the Electromagnetic

Properties frame
[a]

Electromagnetic Properties
> Electrical Conductivity

(Selected)

Electromagnetic Properties
> Electrical Conductivity
> Electrical Conductivity

316

59.6E+06 [S m^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

a. Expand a section by clicking Roll Down

3.

Value
.

Click OK to apply these settings to Copper.

16.4.3. Defining the Calcium Carbonate Deposit Material

Create a new material definition that will be used to model the calcium carbonate deposit on the
heating coil:
1.

Click Material

and name the new material Calcium Carbonate.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Material Group

User

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

[a]

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State
Material
Properties

Solid

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

100.087 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

2.71 [g cm^-3]
[b]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

0.9 [J g^-1
K^-1]

[b]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

[c]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

317

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

> Thermal Conductivity

3.85 [W m^-1
K^-1]

a. The material properties for Calcium Carbonate defined in this table came
directly from the Overview of the Problem to Solve (p. 314) section at the
beginning of this tutorial.
b. Make sure that you change the units to those indicated.
c. You may need to first expand the Transport Properties frame by clicking
Roll Down

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.4. Creating the Domains

This simulation requires both a fluid domain and a solid domain. First, you will create a fluid domain
for the annular region of the heat exchanger.

16.4.4.1. Creating a Fluid Domain

The fluid domain will include the region of fluid flow but exclude the solid copper heating coil.
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to WaterZone.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of WaterZone:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Annulus
[a]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid Models

Initialization

318

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Domain Initialization

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

a. This region name may be different depending on how the mesh was created.
You should pick the region that forms the exterior surface of the volume
surrounding the coil.

3.

Click OK to apply these settings to WaterZone.

16.4.4.2. Creating a Solid Domain

Since you know that the copper heating element will be much hotter than the fluid, you can initialize
the temperature to a reasonable value. The initialization option that is set when creating a domain applies
only to that domain.
Create the solid domain as follows:
1.

Create a new domain named SolidZone.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Coil

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Solid Domain

Solid Definitions

Solid 1

Solid Definitions
> Solid 1
> Solid 1
> Material
Solid
Models

Copper

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Electromagnetic Model

(Selected)

Electromagnetic Model
> Electric Field Model
> Option

Electric
Potential

Initialization Domain Initialization

> Initial Conditions

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

319

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

> Temperature
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

550 [K]

a. This region name may be different depending on how the mesh was created.
You should pick the region that forms the coil.

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.5. Creating the Boundaries

You will now set the boundary conditions using the values given in the problem description.

16.4.5.1. Heating Coil Boundaries

In order to pass electricity through the heating coil, you are going to specify a voltage of 0 [V] at one
end of the coil and 4.4 [V] at the other end:
1.

Click Boundary

and select in SolidZone from the drop-down menu that appears.

2.

Name this new boundary Ground and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Coil End 1[a]

Boundary
Details

Electric Field
> Option

Voltage

Electric Field
> Voltage
a. You will need to click Multi-select from extended list

0 [V]
to see a list of all regions.

4.

Click OK to apply these settings.

5.

Create a similar boundary named Hot at the other end of the coil, Coil End 2, and apply a voltage of 4.4[V].

320

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

16.4.5.2. Inlet Boundary

You will now create an inlet boundary for the cooling fluid (Water).
1.

Create a new boundary in the WaterZone domain named inflow.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

inflow

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

0.4 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.5.3. Opening Boundary

An opening boundary is appropriate for the exit in this case because, at some stage during the solution,
the coiled heating element will cause some recirculation at the exit. At an opening boundary you need
to set the temperature of fluid that enters through the boundary. In this case it is useful to base this
temperature on the fluid temperature at the outlet, since you expect the fluid to be flowing mostly out
through this opening.
1.

Insert a new expression by clicking Expression

2.

Name this new expression OutletTemperature and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

In the Definition entry box, type the formula areaAve(T)@outflow

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Close the Expressions view by clicking Close

6.

Create a new boundary in the WaterZone domain named outflow.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

at the top of the tree view.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

321

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

outflow

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

OutletTemperature
[a]

a. In order to enter an expression, you need to click Enter Expression

8.

Click OK to apply these settings.

A default no slip, adiabatic wall boundary named WaterZone Default will be applied automatically
to the remaining unspecified external boundaries of the WaterZone domain.
Two more boundary conditions are generated automatically when a domain interface is created to
connect the fluid and solid domains. The domain interface is discussed in the next section.

16.4.6. Creating the Domain Interface

1.

Click Domain Interface

from the row of icons located along the top of the screen.

2.

Accept the default name Domain Interface 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of Domain Interface 1:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Solid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

WaterZone

Interface Side 1
> Region List

coil surface

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

322

SolidZone

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Interface Side 2

Additional
Interface
Models

> Region List

F22.33, F30.33, F31.33,

F32.33, F34.33, F35.33

Heat Transfer

(Selected)

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Option

Thin Material

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Material

Calcium Carbonate

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Thickness

1 [mm]

[a]

a. Make sure that you change the units to those indicated.

4.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.7. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s]

For the Convergence Criteria, an RMS value of at least 1e-05 is usually required for adequate
convergence, but the default value is sufficient for demonstration purposes.
3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

323

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

16.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

HeatingCoil.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
While the calculations proceed, you can see residual output for various equations in both the text
area and the plot area. Use the tabs to switch between different plots (for example, Heat Transfer,
Turbulence (KE), and so on) in the plot area. You can view residual plots for the fluid and solid
domains separately by editing the workspace properties (under Workspace > Workspace Properties).

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following topics will be discussed:
16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range
16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator
16.6.3. Specular Lighting
16.6.4. Moving the Light Source

16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range

To grasp the effect of the calcium carbonate deposit, it is beneficial to compare the temperature range
on either side of the deposit.
1.

324

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that both domains are selected,
then click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Create a new contour named Contour 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Location

Domain Interface 1
Side 1

[a]

Variable

Temperature

Range

Local

Boundary Data
> Hybrid

(Selected)

a. This is the deposit side that is in contact with the water.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Take note of the temperature range displayed below the Range drop-down box. The temperature on the
outer surface of the deposit should range from around 380 [K] to 740 [K].

6.

Change the contour location to Domain Interface 1 Side 2 (the deposit side that is in contact
with the coil) and click Apply.
Notice how the temperature ranges from around 420 [K] to 815 [K] on the inner surface of the
deposit.

16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator

Next, you will create a cylindrical locator close to the outside wall of the annular domain. This can be
done by using an expression to specify radius and locating a particular radius with an isosurface.

16.6.2.1. Expression
1.

Create a new expression by clicking Expression

2.

Set the name of this new expression to expradius and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Definition

(x^2 + y^2)^0.5

Click Apply.

16.6.2.2. Variable
1.

Create a new variable by clicking Variable

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

325

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

2.

Set the name of this new variable to radius and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Expression

expradius

Click Apply.

16.6.2.3. Isosurface of the variable

1.

Insert a new isosurface by clicking Location

2.

Accept the default name Isosurface 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

>Isosurface.

Value

radius

Definition

Color

Render

> Value

0.8 [m]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

299 [K]

Max

309 [K]

Show Faces

(Selected)

[a]

[b]

a. The maximum radius is 1 m, so a cylinder locator at a radius of 0.8 m is suitable.

b. The full temperature range is much larger due to temperature extremes on a
small fraction of the isosurface. By neglecting those extreme temperatures, more
colors are used over the range of interest.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Turn off the visibility of Contour 1 so that you have an unobstructed view of Isosurface 1.

Note
The default range legend now displayed is that of the isosurface and not the contour.
The default legend is set according to what is being edited in the details view.

326

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

16.6.2.4. Creating a Temperature Profile Chart

For a quantitative analysis of the temperature variation through the water and heating coil, it is beneficial
to create a temperature profile chart.
First, you will create a line that passes through two turns of the heating coil. You can then graphically
analyze the temperature variance along that line by creating a temperature chart.
1.

Insert a line by clicking Location

2.

Accept the default name Line 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of Line 1

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

> Line.

Value

> Point 1

-0.75, 0, 0

Definition
> Point 2

-0.75, 0, 2.25

Line Type
> Sample

(Selected)

Line Type
> Samples

200

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Create a new chart by clicking Chart

6.

Name this chart Temperature Profile and press the Enter key to continue.

7.

Click the Data Series tab.

8.

Set Data Source > Location to Line 1.

9.

Click the Y Axis tab.

10. Set Data Selection > Variable to Temperature.

11. Click Apply.
You can see from the chart that the temperature spikes upward when entering the deposit region and
is at its maximum at the center of the coil turns.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

327

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

16.6.3. Specular Lighting

Specular lighting is on by default. Specular lighting allows glaring bright spots on the surface of an
object, depending on the orientation of the surface and the position of the light. You can disable
specular lighting as follows:
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab at the bottom of the viewing pane.

2.

Edit Isosurface 1 in the Outline tree view.

Tab

Setting

Render

Show Faces
> Specular

3.

Value

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

16.6.4. Moving the Light Source

To move the light source, click within the 3D Viewer, then press and hold Shift while pressing the arrow
keys left, right, up or down.

Tip
If using the stand-alone version, you can move the light source by positioning the mouse
pointer in the viewer, holding down the Ctrl key, and dragging using the right mouse button.

16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS

This optional step involves generating an ANSYS .cdb data file from the results generated in CFXSolver. The .cdb file could then be used with the ANSYS Multi-field solver to measure the combined
effects of thermal and mechanical stresses on the solid heating coil.
There are two possible ways to export data to ANSYS:
Use CFX-Solver Manager to export data.
Use CFD-Post to export data. This involves:
1.

Importing a surface mesh from ANSYS into CFD-Post, and associating the surface with the corresponding
2D region in the CFX-Solver results file.

2.

Exporting the data to a file containing SFE commands that represent surface element thermal or
mechanical stress values.

3.

Loading the commands created in the previous step into ANSYS and visualizing the loads.

In this case, you will be using CFX-Solver Manager to export data. Since the heat transfer in the solid
domain was calculated in ANSYS CFX, the 3D thermal data will be exported using element type 3D
Thermal (70). The mechanical stresses are calculated on the liquid side of the liquid-solid interface.
These values will be exported using element type 2D Stress (154).

328

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Exporting the Results to ANSYS

16.7.1. Thermal Data

1.

Start CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

Select Tools > Export to ANSYS MultiField.

The Export to ANSYS MultiField Solver dialog box appears.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Results File

HeatingCoil_001.res

Export File

HeatingCoil_001_ansysfsi_70.cdb

Domain Name
> Domain

SolidZone

Domain Name
> Boundary

(Empty) [a]

Export Options
> ANSYS Element Type

3D Thermal (70)

a. Leave Boundary empty since the entire volume is exported for 3D data.

4.

Click Export.
When the export is complete, click OK to acknowledge the message and continue with the next
steps to export data for Mechanical Stresses (p. 329).

16.7.2. Mechanical Stresses

1.

Configure the following setting(s) in the Export to ANSYS MultiField Solver dialog box:
Setting

Value

Results File

HeatingCoil_001.res

Export File

HeatingCoil_001_ansysfsi_154.cdb

Domain Name
> Domain

WaterZone

Domain Name
> Boundary

WaterZone Default

Export Options
> ANSYS Element Type

2.

2D Stress (154)

Click Export.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

329

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

When the export is complete, click OK to acknowledge the message and continue.
3.

Click Close.

4.

Close CFX-Solver Manager.

You now have two exported files that can be used with ANSYS Multi-field solver. When you are finished,
close CFX-Solver Manager and CFD-Post.

330

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 17: Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

This tutorial includes:
17.1.Tutorial Features
17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
17.3. Preparing the Working Directory
17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
17.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
17.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

17.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a multiphase flow simulation involving air and water.
Importing meshes that have CFX-4 and CFX Mesh file formats.
Setting up a simulation using multiple frames of reference.
Using a fluid dependent turbulence model to set different turbulence options for each fluid.
Specifying buoyant flow.
Specifying a degassing outlet boundary to enable air, but not water, to escape from the boundary.
Connecting two domains (one for a tank and one for an impeller inside the tank) via Frozen Rotor interfaces.
Modeling rotational periodicity using periodic boundary conditions.
Using periodic GGI interfaces where the mesh does not match exactly.
Using thin surfaces for blade and baffle surfaces.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Dispersed Phase Zero

Equation
Fluid-Dependent
k-Epsilon

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

331

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Component

Feature

Details

Heat Transfer

None

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Degassing)
Wall: Thin Surface
Wall: (Slip Depends on
Volume Fraction)

Domain Interfaces

Frozen Rotor
Periodic
Thin Surface Partners

Output Control
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Default Locators
Slice Plane

Other

Quantitative Calculation

17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This example simulates the mixing of water and air in a mixing vessel. The geometry consists of a mixing
tank vessel, an air injection pipe, four baffles, a rotating impeller, and a shaft that runs vertically through
the vessel. The impeller rotates at 84 rpm about the X axis (in the counterclockwise direction, when
viewed from above). Air is injected into the vessel through an inlet pipe located below the impeller at
a speed of 5 m/s. The inlet pipe diameter is 2.48 cm. Assume that both the water and air remain at a
constant temperature of 25C and that the air is incompressible, with a density equal to that at 25C
and 1 atmosphere. Also assume that the air bubbles are 3 mm in diameter.
Examine the steady-state distribution of air in the tank. Also calculate the torque and power required
to turn the impeller at 84 rpm.

332

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

Figure 17.1: Cut-away Diagram of the Mixer

The figure above shows the full geometry with part of the tank walls and one baffle cut away. The
symmetry of the vessel allows a 1/4 section of the full geometry to be modeled.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

17.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
MixerImpellerMesh.gtm
MixerTank.geo
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

333

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run MultiphaseMixer.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 357).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type MultiphaseMixer.

6.

Click Save.

17.4.1. Importing the Meshes

In this tutorial, two mesh files are provided: one for the mixer tank excluding the impeller, and one for
the impeller. These meshes fit together to occupy the entire tank. The region occupied by the impeller
mesh is indicated in Figure 17.2: Impeller Mesh Region (p. 334).
Figure 17.2: Impeller Mesh Region

334

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Next, you will import the mesh for the mixer tank, followed by the mesh for the impeller. The impeller
mesh, as provided, is not located in the correct spatial position relative to the tank mesh. After importing
the impeller mesh, you will move it to the correct position.

Note
This simulation involves the use of two domains: a stationary fluid domain on the main 3D
region of the tank mesh and a rotating fluid domain on the main 3D region of the impeller
mesh. It is not necessary to use separate meshes in this type of simulation, as long as there
are 3D regions available for locating these two domains.

17.4.1.1. Importing the Mixer Tank Mesh

The mixer tank mesh is provided as a CFX-4 mesh file (*.geo). Import it as follows:
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX-4 (*geo)

File name

MixerTank.geo

Options
> Mesh Units

Advanced Options
> CFX-4 Options
> Create 3D Regions on
> Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS)

(Cleared)

[a]

a. In this case, the mesh file contains USER3D regions that you do not need.

3.

Click Open.

17.4.1.2. Importing the Impeller Mesh

The impeller mesh is provided as a CFX Mesh file (*.gtm). Import it as follows:
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

335

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Setting

Value

File name

MixerImpellerMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (X up) to view
the mesh assemblies.

17.4.1.3. Relocating the Impeller Mesh

In the next step you will move the impeller mesh to its correct position.
1.

Right-click MixerImpellerMesh.gtm and select Transform Mesh.

The Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transformation

Translation

Method

Deltas

Dx, Dy, Dz

0.275, 0, 0

Click Apply then Close.

17.4.1.4. Viewing the Mesh at the Tank Periodic Boundary

1.

In the Outline workspace, expand the tree to show MixerTank.geo > Principal 3D Regions >
Primitive 3D > Principal 2D Regions.

2.

Click the primitive region BLKBDY_TANK_PER2.

You can now see the mesh on one of the periodic regions of the tank. To reduce the solution time for
this tutorial, the mesh used is very coarse. This is not a suitable mesh to obtain accurate results, but it
is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

Note
If you do not see the surface mesh, highlighting may be turned off. If highlighting is disabled,
toggle Highlighting
. The default highlight type will show the surface mesh for any selected
regions. If you see a different highlighting type, you can alter it by selecting Edit > Options
and browsing to CFX-Pre > Graphics Style.

17.4.2. Creating the Domains

The mixer requires two domains: a rotating impeller domain and a stationary tank domain. Both domains
contain water as a continuous phase and air as a dispersed phase. The domains will model turbulence,
buoyancy, and forces between the fluids.

336

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

17.4.2.1. Rotating Domain for the Impeller

As stated in the problem description, the impeller rotates at 84 rpm.
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to impeller.

2.

Under the Fluid and Particle Definitions setting, delete Fluid 1.

3.

Click Add new item

and name it Air

4.

Click Add new item

and name it Water

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

Main

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Air

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Material

Air at 25 C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology
> Option

Dispersed
Fluid

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology
> Mean Diameter

3 [mm]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

337

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

-9.81 [m
s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density

997 [kg
m^-3]

[a]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion > Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

84 [rev min
^-1]

[b]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Fluid
Models

Global X

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

[c]

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model > Option

None

Heat Transfer

338

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

Turbulence
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Turbulence

Fluid
Pair
Models

> Option

Fluid
Dependent

Fluid Pair

Air | Water

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient
> Surf. Tension Coeff.

0.073 [N
m^-1]

[d]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Grace

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

339

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Momentum Transfer

> Drag Force
> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent
> Value

[e]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Option

Favre
Averaged
Drag Force

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Dispersion Coeff.

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Turbulence Transfer
> Option

Sato
Enhanced
Eddy
Viscosity

[f]

a. This buoyancy reference density value should always be used for dilute dispersed
multiphasic flow.
b. Ensure that you are using the correct unit.
c. Disabling the homogeneous model allows you to specify a unique velocity field
for each fluid.
d. This enables the Grace drag model.
e. A positive value is appropriate for large bubbles.

340

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab
f.

6.

Setting

Value

This models particle-induced turbulence.

Click OK.

17.4.2.2. Stationary Domain for the Main Tank

Next, you will create a stationary domain for the main tank by copying the properties of the existing
impeller domain.
1.

Right-click impeller and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

2.

Rename the duplicated domain to tank and then open it for editing.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Primitive 3D

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

4.

Stationary

Click OK.

17.4.3. Creating the Boundaries

The following boundary conditions will be set:
An inlet through which air enters the mixer.
A degassing outlet, so that only the gas phase can leave the domain.
Thin surfaces for the baffle.
A wall for the hub and the portion of the shaft that is in the rotating domain. This wall will be rotating, and
therefore stationary relative to the rotating domain.
A wall for the portion of the shaft in the stationary domain. This wall will be rotating relative to the stationary
domain.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

341

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

When the default wall boundary is generated, the internal 2D regions of an imported mesh are ignored,
while the regions that form domain boundaries are included.

Note
The blade surfaces of the impeller will be modeled using domain interfaces later in the tutorial.

17.4.3.1. Air Inlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named Airin.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INLET_DIPTUBE

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
342

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Water
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

17.4.3.2. Degassing Outlet Boundary

Create a degassing outlet to represent the free surface where air bubbles escape. The continuous phase
(water) sees this boundary as a free-slip wall and does not leave the domain. The dispersed phase (air)
sees this boundary as an outlet.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named LiquidSurface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

WALL_LIQUID_SURFACE

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

3.

Degassing
Condition

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

343

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Note that no pressure is specified for this boundary. The solver will compute a pressure distribution on
this fixed-position boundary to represent the surface height variations that would occur in the real flow.

17.4.3.3. Thin Surface for the Baffle

In CFX-Pre, thin surfaces can be created by specifying wall boundary conditions on both sides of internal
2D regions. Both sides of the baffle regions will be specified as walls in this case.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named Baffle.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALL_BAFFLES

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

[a]

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

[b]

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

a. The WALL_BAFFLES region includes the surfaces on both sides of the baffle.
You can confirm this by examining WALL_BAFFLES in the region selector.
b. The Free Slip Wall condition can be used for the gas phase since the
contact area with the walls is near zero for low gas phase volume fractions.

3.

344

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

17.4.3.4. Wall Boundary for the Shaft

You will now set up a boundary for the portions of the shaft that are in the tank domain. Since the tank
domain is not rotating, you need to specify a moving wall on the shaft to account for the shaft's rotation.
Part of the shaft is located directly above the air inlet, so the volume fraction of air in this location will
be high and the assumption of zero contact area for the gas phase is not physically correct. In this case,
a no slip boundary is more appropriate than a free slip condition for the air phase. When the volume
fraction of air in contact with a wall is low, a free slip condition is more appropriate for the air phase.
In cases where it is important to correctly model the dispersed phase slip properties at walls for all
volume fractions, you can declare both fluids as no slip, but set up an expression for the dispersed
phase wall area fraction. The expression should result in an area fraction of zero for dispersed phase
volume fractions from 0 to 0.3, for example, and then linearly increase to an area fraction of 1 as the
volume fraction increases to 1.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named TankShaft.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALL_SHAFT,
WALL_SHAFT_CENTER

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

345

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Wall Velocity > Option

Rotating Wall

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Angular Velocity

84 [rev min ^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

3.

Select Water and set the same values as for Air.

4.

Click OK.

Global X

17.4.3.5. Required Boundary in the Impeller Domain

1.

Create a new boundary in the domain impeller named HubShaft.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Hub,Shaft

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

346

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Fluid
Values

Setting

Value

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

17.4.3.6. Modifying the Default Wall Boundary

As mentioned previously, when the volume fraction of air in contact with a wall is low, a free slip condition is more appropriate for the air phase.
1.

In the tree view, open tank Default for editing.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

347

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.
It is not necessary to set the default boundary in the impeller domain since the remaining surfaces
will be assigned interface conditions in the next section.

17.4.4. Creating the Domain Interfaces

The following interfaces will be set:
Blade thin surface interface.
Rotational periodic domain interfaces for the periodic faces of the tank and impeller.
Frozen Rotor interfaces between the impeller and tank domains.

17.4.4.1. Modeling the Blade Using a Domain Interface

You can model thin surfaces using either wall boundaries or domain interfaces. There are some differences
between domain interfaces and ordinary wall boundaries; for example, CFX-Pre automatically detects
the matching domain boundary regions when setting up a domain interface.
Previously, the thin surface representation of the tank baffle was modeled using boundary conditions.
For demonstrational purposes, you will use a domain interface to model the thin surface representation
of the impeller blade (even though using wall boundary conditions would also work).
1.

Create a new domain interface named Blade Thin Surface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Blade

Interface Side 2
> Domain (filter)

impeller

Interface Side 2
> Region List

348

Solid 3.3 2, Solid

3.6 2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Additional
Interface
Models

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Value

Side Dependent

[a]

a. This option allows you to set a fluid dependent treatment on each side of the
interface.

3.

Click OK.
Two boundaries named Blade Thin Surface Side 1 and Blade Thin Surface Side
2 are created automatically.

4.

In the tree view, open Blade Thin Surface Side 1 for editing.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

6.

Click OK.

7.

In the tree view, open Blade Thin Surface Side 2 for editing.

8.

Apply the same settings as for Blade Thin Surface Side 1.

9.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

349

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

17.4.4.2. Rotational Periodic Interfaces

Periodic domain interfaces can either be one-to-one or GGI interfaces. One-to-one transformations occur
for topologically similar meshes whose nodes match within a given tolerance. One-to-one periodic interfaces are more accurate and reduce CPU and memory requirements. Here, you will choose the
Automatic mesh connection method, to let ANSYS CFX choose between one-to-one and GGI.
1.

Create a new domain interface named ImpellerPeriodic.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Periodic1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Periodic2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh
Connection

Global X

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

Click OK.

1.

Create a new domain interface named TankPeriodic.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

350

Automatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 1
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_PER1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_PER2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh
Connection

Global X

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

Automatic

Click OK.

17.4.4.3. Frozen Rotor Interfaces

You will now create three Frozen Rotor interfaces for the regions connecting the two domains. In this
case three separate interfaces are created. You should not try to create a single domain interface for
multiple surfaces that lie in different planes.
1.

Create a new domain interface named Top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

351

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Top

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_TOP

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new domain interface named Bottom.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Frozen Rotor

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Bottom

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_BOT

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

352

Frozen Rotor

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

Click OK.

7.

Create a new domain interface named Outer.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Outer

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_OUTER

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

9.

Frozen Rotor

Click OK.

17.4.5.